Hummer H3 Users Manual GM Owner Manuals

H3 to the manual 1a550f99-3a0b-4fe0-8646-f263f3d77ea3

2015-02-09

: Hummer Hummer-Hummer-H3-Users-Manual-565948 hummer-hummer-h3-users-manual-565948 hummer pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 416 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats ............................................... 1-8
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-10
Child Restraints ....................................... 1-30
Airbag System ......................................... 1-54
Restraint System Check ............................ 1-69
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys ........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-7
Windows ................................................. 2-11
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-14
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-18
Mirrors .................................................... 2-38
Object Detection Systems .......................... 2-44
OnStar
®
System ...................................... 2-48
Universal Home Remote System ................ 2-51
Storage Areas ......................................... 2-56
Sunroof .................................................. 2-60
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls ...................................... 3-22
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-25
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 3-40
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-48
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2
Towing ................................................... 4-48
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-11
Rear Axle ............................................... 5-45
Four-Wheel Drive ..................................... 5-46
Front Axle ............................................... 5-46
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-46
Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-49
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-52
Tires ...................................................... 5-54
Appearance Care ..................................... 5-91
Vehicle Identification ............................... 5-100
Electrical System .................................... 5-101
Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-107
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-16
Index .................................................................1
2008 HUMMER H3 Owner Manual M
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, HUMMER,
and H3 are registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for HUMMER whenever it appears
in this manual.
This manual describes features that may be available in
this model, but your vehicle may not have all of them.
For example, more than one entertainment system may
be offered or your vehicle may have been ordered
without a front passenger or rear seats.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15862068 A First Printing
©
2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
ii
Using this Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle to learn
about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures
and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to
ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to help
avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do
this” or “Do Not let
this happen.”
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
You will also find notices in this manual.
Notice: These mean there is something that
could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
iv
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-3
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-3
Heated Seats .................................................1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Rear Seats .......................................................1-8
60/40 Split Bench Seat ...................................1-8
Safety Belts ...................................................1-10
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-10
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-16
Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-24
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-29
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-30
Child Restraints .............................................1-30
Older Children ..............................................1-30
Infants and Young Children ............................1-33
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-37
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position .........................1-48
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position ..........................1-50
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ............................1-51
Airbag System ...............................................1-54
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-57
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-59
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-60
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-60
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-61
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-62
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-67
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................1-68
Restraint System Check ..................................1-69
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-69
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-70
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
To move a manual seat forward or rearward:
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-2
Power Seats
If the vehicle has power
seats, the controls used to
operate them are located
on the outboard side of
the seats.
To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
•Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
•Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion
by moving the front of the control up or down.
•Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion
by moving the rear of the control up or down.
Power Lumbar
If your vehicle has this
feature, the control is
located on the outboard
side of the seat(s).
Press and hold the front of the control until you have
the desired lumbar support. To decrease lumbar
support, press and hold the rear of the control.
1-3
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the outboard
side of the front seats.
This feature will heat the cushion and back of the seats.
Press the top of the switch to turn the heat to the
high setting. Press the bottom of the switch to turn the
heat to the low setting. Put the switch in the center
position to turn the heat off.
The ignition must be on for the heated seat feature to
work. The seat will heat to the last setting if the ignition
has been turned off and then turned back on.
The passenger’s safety belt must be fastened for the
heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
1-4
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That
could cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
The seats have manual reclining seatbacks. The lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side
of the seats.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever and move the seatback to
the desired position, then release the lever to
lock the seatback in place.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to
the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked.
1-5
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
1-6
Head Restraints
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the occupant’s head. This
position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. To lower
the head restraint,
press the button,
located on the top
of the seatback,
and push the head
restraint down.
1-7
Rear Seats
60/40 Split Bench Seat
The 60/40 split bench seats can be folded to give
you more cargo space.
Folding the Seatbacks
To fold the rear seatback(s), do the following:
1. Make sure that nothing is on, under,
or in front of the seat.
2. Place your hand under
the front of the seat
cushion and lift
the cushion up while
moving it forward.
There is a label below the seat cushion with
instructions to aid in seat operation.
1-8
3. Pull the cushion forward until it rests in the footwell.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
4. Lift the latch on top of the seatback and pull the
seatback forward. Fold the seatback down until it
is nearly flat.
5. If the seatback will not fold nearly flat, try moving
the front seat forward and/or moving the front
seatback more upright.
6. Repeat the steps for the other half of the 60/40 split
bench seat.
1-9
Returning the Seatbacks to an
Upright Position
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That
could cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To return the seatback(s) to the upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward all the way.
2. Place your hand under the front of the seat cushion
and lift the cushion while moving it rearward until it
latches into position.
3. Pull forward on the seatback and push down on
the seat cushion to make sure the seat is securely
in place.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
1-10
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash
and you are not wearing a safety belt, your
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from it
and be seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up.
Always fasten your safety belt, and check that
your passenger(s) are restrained properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-28.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many
of them, people who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without belts they could
have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter... a lot!
1-11
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
Put someone on it.
1-12
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop. The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-13
or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones take the forces.
That is why safety belts make such good sense.
1-14
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if
I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in
a crash — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a
good driver does not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-15
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-30
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-33. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give as much
protection this way.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under
the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not on the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is over an armrest.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones,
and that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
1-20
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
1-21
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is behind the body.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash,
you would not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
1-22
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
1-23
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the
belt across you more slowly.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-30.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in
this section.
1-24
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch
plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should
rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide
loop on the side wall.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-25
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for
the driver and right front passenger.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To move it down, press
the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
You can move the
height adjuster up just
by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help
tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash
if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation
are met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety
belts in a side crash or a rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-70.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
1-26
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a
comfort guide to the safety belt:
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge
of the seatback and the interior body to remove
the guide from its storage clip.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-27
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
1-28
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of
the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the
guide and clip inward and slide them in between
the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the
loop of the elastic cord exposed.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that
the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women,
as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective
is wearing them properly.
1-29
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When
you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will
wear, so the extender will be long enough for you.
To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else
use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit.
The extender has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it
to the regular safety belt. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-30
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
•Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees
bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
•Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide.
See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-24 for more
information. If the shoulder belt still does not rest
on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.
•Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
•Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the
face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly
below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones
in a crash. It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-24.
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-31
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-32
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some
age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle
and never allow children to play with the
safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not
use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need
to use a child restraint.
1-33
{CAUTION:
People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash an infant will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it. For example, in a crash at
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant
will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
1-34
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-35
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a
crash, an infant in a rear-facing seat settles
into the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
should always be secured in appropriate
infant restraints.
1-36
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that
is unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children should always be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides
restraint with the
seating surface
against the back
of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
1-37
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-38
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-42 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when
no child is in it.
1-39
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint. Because there are
different systems, it is important to refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint.
Make sure the child is properly secured,
following the instructions that came with
that restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in
a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
1-40
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62
for additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when
no child is in it.
1-41
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
1-42
Top Tether Anchor
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child
restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer
whether or not a kit is available.
1-43
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i(Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j(Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Each outboard seating position in the rear seat has
exposed metal lower anchors in the crease between
the seatback and the seat cushion.
The top tether anchors are located on the back of the
rear seatbacks. Be sure to use an anchor located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. See
Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-40 for additional
information.
Rear Seat
1-44
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
1-45
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck
and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the child
restraint manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or the
seat. When removing the child restraint, always
remember to return the safety belts to their normal,
stowed position before folding the rear seat.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-46
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the tether over
the headrest or head
restraint.
1-47
If the position you are
using has a fixed headrest
or head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
around the headrest
or head restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
study the instructions that came with your child restraint
to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42
for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you
secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a
top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-42 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-40.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-48
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-49
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top tether
is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position
Many child restraints are too wide to be correctly
secured in the center rear seat, although some of them
will fit there. If the center seat position is too narrow
for your child restraint, secure it in a rear outside seat
position.
If you secure a child restraint in the center seat position,
follow the instructions in Securing a Child Restraint in
a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-48.
1-50
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 1-40.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-62 and Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 3-30 for more information on
this, including important safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62
for additional information.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-42
for how to install your child restraint using LATCH. If you
secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a
top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-42 for top tether anchor locations.
1-51
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the
vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-30.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-52
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock. 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
1-53
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
Remove any additional material from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
•A frontal airbag for the driver.
•A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
•A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
•A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the passenger seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
1-54
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags
are designed to work with safety belts,
but do not replace them.
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle and in
the event of a vehicle rollover. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-55
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against,
or very close to, any airbag when it inflates
can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts
help keep you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with roof-rail airbags.
{CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
Older Children on page 1-30 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-33.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29
for more information.
1-56
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
1-57
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
1-58
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
•If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
•If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
•If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
•If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
1-59
Your vehicle has roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System
on page 1-54. Roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. In addition, these
roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover.
Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed threshold level. The
threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal
impacts, near-frontal impacts, or rear impacts. Both
roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of
the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts
that the vehicle is about to roll over.
Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the
driver’s seat. The sensor provides information that is
used to determine if the airbags should deploy at
a reduced level or at full deployment.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from
the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag
causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy.
The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all
part of the airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the
ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows that
have occupant seating positions.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
1-60
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard
seating positions in the first and second rows. The
rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events,
although no system can prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 1-59 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
so quickly that some people may not even realize
an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at
least partially inflated for some time after they deploy.
Some components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-60.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact
with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There may be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated airbags.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from
seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust
in the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma or
other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
1-61
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
•Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
•Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 7-16 and Event Data Recorders on page 7-17.
•Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible in the instrument
panel when you start your vehicle.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off,
will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-30.
United States Canada
1-62
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
1-63
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
•The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
•The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
•The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
•The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
•A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
•The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
•Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-30.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer
to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-51.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint
is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head
Restraints on page 1-7.
1-64
Remove any additional material from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer/retailer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag anytime the system senses that a person of
adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing system has
allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and
then enable the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
1-65
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on
the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and
“Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. This may unintentionally cause the passenger
sensing system to turn the airbag(s) off for some
adult size occupants. If this happens, just let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more on this, including
important safety information.
1-66
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment other than any that GM has
approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 1-68 for more information about modifications
that can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion
and seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-15.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close
to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-67
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side
impact sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag
wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different
vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat
heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-62.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-73
for additional important information.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
1-68
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-28 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 5-94.
Airbags
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-60.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
1-69
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any crash
may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being used
at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-29.
1-70
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ...................................................2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ................................2-9
Lockout Protection ..........................................2-9
Swing-gate ..................................................2-10
Windows ........................................................2-11
Power Windows ............................................2-12
Sun Visors ...................................................2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-14
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-14
Passlock
®
(U. S. Only) ..................................2-15
PASS-Key
®
III+ ............................................2-16
PASS-Key
®
III+ Operation (Canada Only) .........2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-18
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-18
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-18
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-20
Starting the Engine .......................................2-20
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-22
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-23
Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-26
Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive ............................2-27
Parking Brake ..............................................2-32
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission) ............................2-33
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission) ............................2-35
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) .....2-35
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-36
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-36
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-37
Section 2 Features and Controls
2-1
Mirrors ...........................................................2-38
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar
®
, Compass and
Temperature Display ..................................2-38
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-41
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-43
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-44
Object Detection Systems ...............................2-44
Rear Vision Camera ......................................2-44
OnStar
®
System .............................................2-48
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-51
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With One Triangular LED) ...........................2-52
Storage Areas ................................................2-56
Glove Box ...................................................2-56
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-56
Front Seat Storage Net .................................2-57
Front Armrest Storage Area ...........................2-57
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-57
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-59
Convenience Net ..........................................2-59
Cargo Cover ................................................2-59
Cargo Tie Downs ..........................................2-59
Sunroof .........................................................2-60
Section 2 Features and Controls
2-2
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
Use the double-sided key for the ignition and driver’s
door lock.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer/retailer
provides the owner with a pair of identical keys and a
key code number.
2-3
The key code number tells your dealer/retailer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this
number in a safe place. If you keys are lost, new keys can
be made using this number. Your dealer/retailer should
also have this number.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, call the Roadside
Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-6.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on
a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in operating range.
This is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer to
your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
•Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
•Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
•Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section.
•If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
You can lock and unlock the vehicle’s doors and disarm
or arm the theft-deterrent system from about 3 feet (1 m)
up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-14 for additional information.
UNLOCK: Press this
button to unlock the driver’s
door and turn on the
interior lamps. The parking
lamps may also flash,
and the horn may chirp,
when this button is pressed.
Press the unlock button again within three seconds and
all of the doors will unlock.
LOCK: Press this button to lock all the doors. The
parking lamps may also flash and the horn may chirp
when this button is pressed.
If a door is open or ajar when the lock button is pressed,
the doors will lock, but the theft-deterrent system will
not arm until the open door is closed.
Different feedback modes can be programmed through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See “Remote
Keyless Entry Feedback” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-40.
L(Panic): Press this button to make the horn sound
and the headlamps and taillamps flash for up to
30 seconds. To turn them off, do one of these three
things: wait for 30 seconds; press the panic button
again; or start the vehicle.
2-5
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is
lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through
your dealer/retailer. Remember to bring any remaining
transmitters with you when you go to your dealer/retailer.
When the dealer/retailer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer/retailer has
coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not
unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum
of four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in the RKE transmitter
should last about two years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the
normal range in any location. If you have to get close
to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it is
probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not
to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery:
1. Insert a coin, or similar object, in the slot between
the covers of the transmitter housing. Gently pry
the transmitter apart.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a
three-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-6
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
•Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance
of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the doors
whenever you drive.
•Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
•Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use the key in the driver’s door or
use the remote keyless entry transmitter.
From the inside, use the manual lock levers or power
door lock switch.
2-7
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located on
the driver’s and the
front passenger’s doors.
Press L (lock) to lock all the doors at once.
To unlock all the doors, press U (unlock).
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, it is
programmed from the factory to lock the doors
automatically when the shift lever is moved out of
PARK (P). All the doors will unlock when the shift lever
is moved back into PARK (P).
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, it is
programmed from the factory to lock the doors
automatically when the vehicle speed is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h). The doors will unlock when the key is
removed from the ignition.
To personalize the automatic door locks, see “Automatic
Door Locks” under DIC Operation and Displays on
page 3-40.
Driver’s side shown
2-8
Rear Door Security Locks
With this feature, you can lock the rear doors so they
cannot be opened from the inside.
The rear door security lock
is located on the inside
edge of each rear door.
To engage the security locks, do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Using your ignition key, turn the lock toward the
front of the vehicle.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat these steps on the other rear door.
If you want to open a rear door when the security lock
is on, unlock the door and open the door from the
outside.
To disengage the security locks, do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Using your ignition key, turn the lock to the vertical
position.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat these steps on the other rear door.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
If the power door lock switch is pressed when a door is
open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors
will lock and then the driver’s door will unlock. A chime
will sound to indicate that the key has been left in
the ignition.
2-9
Swing-gate
To lock or unlock the swing-gate, use the power door
lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter.
{CAUTION:
Make sure the swing-gate is completely closed.
Driving with the swing-gate open could injure
pedestrians or damage the vehicle.
To open the swing-gate, pull the door handle.
Pull the swing-gate rearward slightly and it will
automatically open.
2-10
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
2-11
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome from extreme heat in
warm or hot weather and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with
children.
When there are children in the rear seat use
the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
The power window controls are located on each door.
The driver’s door has switches for the passenger
windows as well. Your power windows will work when
the ignition is in ACC (Accessory) or ON, or when
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-20.
Pull up the front edge of the control to raise the window.
Press the front edge of the control down to lower the
window.
2-12
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window has an express-down feature that
allows you to lower the window without holding the
switch. Press the front edge of the switch past the
first position to activate the express-down mode.
The express-down mode can be canceled at any
time by pulling up on the switch. To open the window
partway, press the front of the switch to the first position
until the window is at the desired level.
Window Lockout
o(Window Lockout): The window lockout button is
located forward of the window switches. This feature
disables the passenger’s window switches when
the button is pressed. Press the button again to turn the
lockout off. A red band on the side of the button can
be seen when the windows are not locked out.
Sun Visors
To block glare, pull the visor down. It can also be
detached from the center mount and moved to the side
to block glare from that direction. There are extenders
that can be pulled out for further coverage.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has a vanity mirror located on the driver’s
and passenger’s visor.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have an illuminated vanity mirror on
both visors. Lift the cover on the mirror and the lights will
automatically come on.
2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle has a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
To activate the content theft-deterrent system:
1. Close all the doors.
2. Lock the doors with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The security light, located on the
instrument panel cluster, will flash.
If the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed, but a door is open, the doors will lock,
the lights may flash and the horn may sound. Close
the open door and the alarm system will arm.
If a locked door is not opened using the remote keyless
entry transmitter, or by OnStar
®
, the alarm will go off.
First, a pre-alarm will sound the horn at reduced
intensity for 10 seconds. Then, the front turn signal
lamps will flash for two minutes, and the horn will sound
for two minutes. The alarm will then turn off to save
battery power.
Starting the engine with the correct key will shut off the
pre-alarm or alarm at any time.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system will not activate
if you lock the doors with the key, the manual door lock,
or power door lock switch. The system can only be
activated using the remote keyless entry transmitter, or
by OnStar
®
. See OnStar
®
System on page 2-48 for
additional information. You should also remember that
you can start your vehicle with the correct key if the
alarm has been set off.
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
•If you do not want to arm the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
manual door lock lever, the power door lock switch,
or the key, after the doors are closed.
•If the content theft-deterrent system is armed,
unlock the doors by pressing the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by
OnStar
®
. Unlocking a door any other way will
activate the alarm.
2-14
If you set off the alarm by accident, you can turn it off
by pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, starting the vehicle with the correct key, or
by having OnStar
®
unlock the doors. The alarm will
not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, activate the system by
locking the doors with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
2. Unlock the door with the manual door lock and
open the door. This should set off the pre-alarm.
Wait 10 seconds for the full alarm to activate.
3. To turn the alarm off, press the unlock button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter or start
the engine.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
lights flash, check to see if the horn works. The horn
fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-102.
If the alarm does not sound or the front turn signal
lamps do not flash, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Passlock
®
(U. S. Only)
Your vehicle has the Passlock
®
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock
®
is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock
®
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key. If an incorrect key is used or the
ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system
is disabled and the vehicle will not start.
During normal operation, the security light will turn off
approximately five seconds after the engine is started.
See Security Light on page 3-39.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine
off. However, your Passlock
®
system is not working
properly and must be serviced by your dealer/retailer.
Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock
®
at this time.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
In an emergency, call the Roadside Assistance Center.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-15
PASS-Key
®
III+
The PASS-Key
®
III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key
®
III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
PASS-Key
®
III+ Operation
(Canada Only)
Your vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
The key uses a transponder that matches an immobilizer
control unit in your vehicle. Only the correct key will
start the vehicle. If the key is ever damaged, you may
not be able to start your vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be
a problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn
the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears
to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this
time, you may also want to check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-102.
2-16
If the engine still does not start with the other key, your
vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the
first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can
service the theft-deterrent system and have a new
key made.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoder to
learn the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys can be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a dealer/retailer can service the theft-deterrent
system to have new keys made. To program additional
keys you will require two current driver’s keys.
To program a new key do the following:
1. Verify that the new key has PK3+ stamped on it.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start
see your dealer/retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the second current driver’s key in the ignition
and start the engine within ten seconds of removing
the previous key. If the engine will not start see
your dealer/retailer for service.
5. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key. Insert the key to
be programmed and turn it to ON/RUN within
ten seconds of removing the previous key.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are
to be programmed.
If the security light comes on and stays on while driving,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn it off.
The theft-deterrent system, however, is not working
properly and must be serviced by your dealer/retailer.
Your vehicle is not protected by the theft-deterrent
system at this time.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-17
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
•Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
•Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
•Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
•Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-50 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn to
four different positions.
To shift out of PARK (P), the ignition must be in
ON/RUN and the regular brake pedal must be applied.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the key.
Use the correct key and turn the key only with your
hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If none of
this works, then your vehicle needs service.
(A) LOCK/OFF: This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission on automatic transmission
vehicles. It locks the steering wheel on manual
transmission vehicles when the key is removed. It is a
theft-deterrent feature. You will only be able to remove
your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF.
2-18
If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition
switch cannot be turned to LOCK/OFF unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P).
If the steering wheel is locked, move it from right to
left and turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If none of
this works, then your vehicle needs service.
(B) ACC/ACCESSORY: This is the position in which
you can operate your electrical accessories or items
plugged into the accessory power outlets. On automatic
transmission vehicles, this position unlocks the
ignition. On manual transmission vehicles, it unlocks the
ignition and steering wheel. Use this position if your
vehicle must be pushed or towed.
(C) ON/RUN: This is the position that the switch returns
to after you start your engine and release the switch.
The switch stays in ON when the engine is running.
But even when the engine is not running, you can use
ON/RUN to operate the electrical accessories and
to display some instrument panel cluster warning and
indicator lights. The transmission is also unlocked in
this position on automatic transmission vehicles.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in
the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with
the engine off. You may not be able to start your
vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an
extended period of time.
START (D): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
When the engine is not running, ACC/ACCESSORY
and ON/RUN allows you to operate the electrical
accessories, such as the radio or items plugged into
the accessory power outlets.
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s
door when the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an
easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the
key in the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime
will sound, when you open the driver’s door. Always
remember to remove your key from the ignition and take
it with you. This will lock your ignition and transmission.
Also, always remember to lock the doors.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an
extended period of time.
2-19
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
20 minutes after the engine is turned off:
•Audio System
•Front Wipers
•Power Windows
•Sunroof (if equipped)
These features will work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, these features continue working
for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.
Starting the Engine
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
The engine will not start in any other position -- this
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in neutral position and the
parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to
the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle will not
start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down.
That is a safety feature.
2-20
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and
transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the
engine and protects components. If the ignition
key is turned to the START position, and then
released when the engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or
until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not
start and the key is held in START for many
seconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent
gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running. Engine cranking
can be stopped by turning the ignition switch
to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently until the oil warms
up and lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
2-21
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0° F (−18°C).
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located in the engine compartment
behind the underhood fuse block on the driver’s
side of the vehicle.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer/retailer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you
the best advice for that particular area.
2-22
Automatic Transmission Operation
The automatic transmission has a shift lever on the
console.
It features an electronic shift position indicator within
the instrument cluster. This display must be powered
anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of
PARK (P). This means that if your key is turned off,
but not in LOCK, there will be a small current drain on
your battery which could discharge your battery over
a period of time. If you need to leave your key in
the ignition but not in LOCK for an extended period,
it is recommended that you disconnect the battery cable
from the battery to prevent discharging your battery.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start the engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Transmission) on page 2-33. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-50.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transmission shift lock control system.
You must fully apply your regular brakes first and
then press the shift lever button before you can
shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON.
2-23
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
press the shift lever button and move the shift lever
into another gear. See Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission) on page 2-35
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow
on page 4-39
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-24
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
•Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h),
push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
•Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more,
push the accelerator all the way down.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
Control on page 4-10.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer. You may
want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if
necessary, a lower gear if the transmission shifts too
often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving. However it reduces vehicle speed more than
DRIVE (D) without using your brakes. You might
choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) when driving
on hilly, winding roads, when towing a trailer, so there
is less shifting between gears and when going down
a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than THIRD (3) without using your brakes.
You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help
control your speed as you go down steep mountain
roads, but then you would also want to use your
brakes off and on.
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than SECOND (2) without using your brakes.
You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the
vehicle is moving forward, the transmission will not shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2-25
Manual Transmission Operation
This is your shift pattern.
Here is how to operate your manual transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you slowly press down on the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (30 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Then press
the clutch pedal back down and shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press
the accelerator pedal.
THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH (3, 4 and 5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same
way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal.
After the vehicle stops, shift into REVERSE (R).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal. If it is hard to shift, let the shift lever
return to NEUTRAL and release the clutch pedal.
Then press the clutch again and shift into REVERSE (R).
Do not attempt to shift into the fifth gear position prior
to shifting into REVERSE (R). Your transmission has a
lock out feature which prevents a fifth gear to reverse
gear shift.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
2-26
Up-Shift Light
This light will show you
when to shift to the next
higher gear for best
fuel economy.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift
when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go
on and off if you quickly change the position of
the accelerator. Ignore the shift light when you
downshift.
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and has a manual
transmission, disregard the shift light when the transfer
case is in four-wheel low.
For more information, see Up-Shift Light on page 3-32.
Shift Speeds
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Do not shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive
Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive sends your engine’s driving
power to all four wheels for extra traction. To get the
most out of Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive, you must
be familiar with its operation.
2-27
Transfer Case Buttons
The transfer case buttons are located to the right of the
instrument panel cluster. Use these switches to shift
into and out of the different Full-Time Four-Wheel
Drive modes.
You can choose between four modes:
4m(Four-Wheel High): This setting is used for driving
in most street and highway situations. You can also
use this setting for light or variable off-road conditions.
N (NEUTRAL): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-48 or Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-48 for more information.
Notice: Driving on pavement in Four-Wheel
High Lock or Four Wheel Low Lock for extended
periods may cause premature wear on your vehicle’s
powertrain and tires. Do not drive in Four-Wheel
High Lock or Four-Wheel Low Lock on pavement for
extended periods.
4mQ (Four-Wheel-High Lock): Use this mode
when you need extra traction in most off-road situations
such as sand, mud, snow or level, rocky trails.
Notice: Operating your vehicle in
Four-Wheel-Low Lock above 30 mph (48 km/h) for
any extended period of time could cause damage
to the transfer case. Do not operate your vehicle
in Four-Wheel-Low Lock above 30 mph (48 km/h) for
extended periods.
4nQ (Four-Wheel-Low Lock): This mode delivers
extra torque to all four wheels and is used for extreme
off-road conditions. You might choose 4-Wheel-Low
Lock if you are driving in off-road situations, such as,
deep sand, mud, or snow and climbing or descending
steep hills.
If the vehicle has a locking rear axle, when in this mode
you can also choose to lock the rear axle for additional
traction in extreme off-road situations. See Locking Rear
Axle on page 4-6.
2-28
Indicator lights in the buttons show which mode you
are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition the mode the vehicle is in
will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should
take your vehicle to your dealer for service. An indicator
light will flash while shifting the transfer case. It will
remain lit when the shift is complete. If for some reason
the transfer case cannot make a requested shift,
it will return to the last chosen setting.
If the SERV 4WD message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) stays on, you should take your vehicle to
your dealer for service. See Service 4WD message
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-43.
Shifting between Four-Wheel High
and Four-Wheel-High Lock
With the vehicle traveling less than 45 mph
(72 km/h), press and release the Four-Wheel High
or Four-Wheel-High Lock button. The indicator light
will flash while shifting. It will remain lit when the
shift is complete.
It may be necessary to drive backwards while turning
for a distance of 25 feet (7.5 m) to get the lock
feature to disengage.
Shifting into Four-Wheel Low Lock
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the indicator light stops flashing could cause
damage to the transfer case. Always wait until the
indicator light stops flashing before putting the
transmission back in gear.
To shift into Four-Wheel-Low Lock, the ignition must be in
ON and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than
3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
The preferred method for shifting into Four-Wheel Low is
to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
Press and release the Four-Wheel-Low Lock button.
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, the clutch
pedal must be pressed to the floor while you press the
Four-Wheel-Low Lock button, or the shift will not be
completed. You must wait for the Four-Wheel-Low Lock
indicator light to stop flashing and remain lit before
shifting your transmission in gear.
It is normal for your vehicle to have engagement noise
and bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Low
and Four-Wheel High ranges or from NEUTRAL with
the engine running.
If the Four-Wheel-Low Lock button is pressed when
your vehicle is in gear and/or moving too fast, the
Four-Wheel-Low Lock indicator light will flash for
15 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 15 seconds
the transfer case will return to the last chosen setting.
2-29
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Low Lock
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the indicator light stops flashing could cause
damage to the transfer case. Always wait until the
indicator light stops flashing before putting the
transmission back in gear.
To shift out of Four-Wheel-Low Lock, your vehicle must
be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in ON. The
preferred method for shifting out of Four-Wheel-Low
Lock is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the Four-Wheel High
or Four-Wheel-High Lock button. If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, the clutch pedal must be pressed
to the floor while you press the Four-Wheel High or
Four-Wheel-High Lock button, or the shift will not be
completed. You must wait for the Four-Wheel High or
Four-Wheel-High Lock indicator light to stop flashing and
remain lit before shifting your transmission into gear.
It is normal for your vehicle to have engagement noise
and bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Low
and Four-Wheel High ranges or from NEUTRAL with
the engine running.
If the Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel-High Lock button
is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving
too fast, the Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel-High Lock
indicator light will flash for 15 seconds but will not
complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than
3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
Shifting Into NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, do the following:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Start the vehicle by turning the ignition to START.
3. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). If your
vehicle has a manual transmission, press and
hold the clutch pedal down while you perform
Steps 5 through 9.
4. Shift the transfer case to Four-Wheel High.
2-30
{CAUTION:
Shifting an all-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the automatic transmission is in
PARK (P) or the manual transmission is in
any gear. You or others could be injured.
Make sure the parking brake is firmly set
before you shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
5. Simultaneously press and hold the Four-Wheel
High and Four-Wheel-Low Lock buttons for
10 seconds. The NEUTRAL light will come on when
the transfer case shift to NEUTRAL is complete.
6. Press and hold the regular brake pedal and Shift
the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one second,
then shift the transmission for one second to
DRIVE (D) for an automatic transmission, or
FIRST (1) for vehicles have a manual transmission
and then let out the clutch. This is to ensure the
transfer case is in NEUTRAL. If not, repeat
this procedure starting at Step 3.
7. Turn the engine off, by turning the key to ACC.
8. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P) for
an automatic transmission, or FIRST (1) for
vehicles that have a manual transmission.
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift out of NEUTRAL:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) for an
automatic transmission, or press the clutch pedal
for vehicles that have a manual transmission.
Then turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (Four-Wheel High, Four-Wheel-High Lock
or Four-Wheel-Low Lock).
After the transfer case has shifted out of
NEUTRAL the light will go out.
4. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the indicator light stops flashing could cause
damage to the transfer case. Always wait until the
indicator light stops flashing before putting the
transmission back in gear.
5. You may start the engine and shift the transmission
to the desired position.
2-31
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located to the left of the
regular brake pedal,
near the driver’s door.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push the parking brake
pedal down to its fully-applied position with your
left foot.
A chime will activate and the brake warning light,
located on the instrument panel, will flash when the
parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving
at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least three seconds.
The chime will deactivate and the light will turn off
when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is
moving below 3 mph (5 km/h). See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-33.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking brake
symbol, directly rearward to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-50.
2-32
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle
can roll. If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you
are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-50.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 2-32 for more
information.
{CAUTION:
With all-wheel drive, your vehicle will be free to
roll — even if your shift lever is in PARK (P) — if
your transfer case is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear, four-wheel
high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) — not in
NEUTRAL.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing
the shift lever button and moving the lever as
far forward as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is
in PARK (P).
2-33
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you
can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without
first pressing the shift lever button. If you can, it means
that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into
PARK (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-33.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-34
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-23.
The shift lock control system is designed to do the
following:
•Prevent the ignition key from being removed
unless the shift lever is in PARK (P).
•Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN
and the regular brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock control system is always functional
except in the case of a dead battery or low voltage
(less than 9 V) battery.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-42 for more
information.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, push the
shift lever all the way into PARK (P)
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have
your vehicle serviced soon.
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Your vehicle has a manual transmission. Before you
get out of your vehicle, move the shift lever into
REVERSE (R), and firmly apply the parking brake.
Once the shift lever has been placed into REVERSE (R)
with the clutch pedal pressed in, turn the ignition key
to LOCK, remove the key and release the clutch.
If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is pulling
a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-50.
2-35
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
•The exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
•Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
•Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
•Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
•Repairs were not done correctly.
•Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
•Drive it only with all the windows down
to blow out any CO; and
•Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-36
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running.
But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-36.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle
even if the climate control fan is at the highest
setting. One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-35.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the automatic transmission shift lever is not
fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave your
vehicle when the engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when it is on fairly level
ground, always set the parking brake and
move the automatic transmission shift lever
to PARK (P), or the manual transmission shift
lever to NEUTRAL.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will
not move. See Shifting Into PARK (P) (Automatic
Transmission) on page 2-33 and Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission) on page 2-35.
If you are pulling a trailer with your vehicle, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-50.
2-37
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with OnStar
®
, Compass
and Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, the
automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level to
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror has a dual display in the upper right corner
of the mirror face that shows the compass reading
and the outside temperature.
Control buttons for the OnStar
®
system are at the
bottom of the mirror. See OnStar
®
System on page 2-48
for more information about the services OnStar
®
provides.
Y:This button is used as a toggle for changing
displays and as an on/off toggle during a function.
Your vehicle may also have a Rear Vision Camera.
See Rear Vision Camera on page 2-44 for more
information.
Slide-Out Video Feature Enable
Press and hold Yfor three seconds to toggle the
slide-out video feature on/off. An indicator light will turn
on at the time the slide-out video is enabled. If the
slide-out video feature is on, each time the vehicle is
put into reverse, the slide-out video screen will extend.
See Rear Vision Camera on page 2-44 for more
information.
The slide-out video feature will remain in the current
on/off state each time the ignition goes through its cycle.
Slide-Out Video Cleaning
The slide-out video has to be enabled before the
cleaning process can take place.
•Press and hold Yfor six seconds or until the lower
indicator light turns on.
•While extended for cleaning, neither the screen nor
the camera will have power.
•Press Ybriefly or wait 30 seconds to end cleaning.
The screen will then retract.
2-38
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror comes on each time
the ignition is turned to start. To turn the automatic
dimming feature off or back on, press and hold Yfor
nine seconds. The indicator light on the mirror is lit
when the automatic dimming feature is on.
Temperature Display
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius:
•Press Yfor approximately four seconds to toggle
the display from F (Fahrenheit) to C (Celsius)
to OFF.
The temperature display will remain in its current
state each time the ignition goes through its cycle.
•At start up, if the vehicle has been off for less
than two and a half hours, and the last stored
temperature was less than the current termperature,
the sensor will increase 1°F every two minutes
until the correct temperature is displayed.
•If the vehicle has been off more than two and a
half hours, or the last stored temperature is
greater than the current temperature, the current
temperature immediately displays.
•If the temperature is 37°F (3°C) or lower, ICE will
flash on the temperature display. This display will
flash every two seconds for a period of one minute.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for
an extended period of time, see your dealer/retailer.
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
Compass Display
Press the Ybutton, located at the bottom of the mirror,
next to the OnStar
®
control buttons to turn the
compass/temperature display on or off.
If CAL is not displayed, press and hold Yfor
15 seconds, or until CAL is displayed. The compass
is now in calibration mode. For more information,
see “Compass Calibration” following.
The mirror can be calibrated in one of two ways:
•Drive the vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph
(8 km/h) until the CAL is no longer displayed in
the compass window. Then continue to drive
to make sure all eight directions are available.
•Drive the vehicle under normal operating conditions.
2-39
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
outside of zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will
be necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass
variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic
north and true geographic north. If not adjusted
to account for compass variance, the compass could
give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold Yfor 12 seconds until a zone
number appears in the display. The compass is
now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the Yuntil the desired zone
number appears in the display. Release the button.
After approximately four seconds of inactivity,
the new zone number will be locked in and the
compass/temperature display will return.
2-40
Cleaning the Mirror
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that could cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
Your vehicle may have this mirror. When on, an
automatic dimming mirror will dim to the proper level to
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper
right corner of the mirror with the compass reading and
the outside temperature.
Yb:Briefly press this button to turn the display on
or off.
Your vehicle may also have a Rear Vision Camera.
See Rear Vision Camera on page 2-44 for more
information.
Temperature Display
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
compass/temperature button. Pressing the compass/
temperature button once briefly, will toggle the display
reading on and off. To alternate the temperature reading
between Fahrenheit and Celsius, press and hold
the compass/temperature button for approximately
three seconds until the display blinks F and C. After
approximately five seconds of inactivity, the display will
stop blinking and display the last selection made.
If an abnormal reading is displayed, see your
dealer/retailer.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
O:Press this button to turn the automatic dimming
feature on or off. The indicator light to the left of the
button will turn on to indicate when the feature is on.
Once the mirror is turned off, it will remain off until it is
turned back on, or until the vehicle is restarted.
Compass Operation
Press the compass/temperature button once briefly
to turn the display on or off.
2-41
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
•If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
•After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading, N for North, for
example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
•The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
in the compass/temperature button for approximately
nine seconds or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will
be necessary to adjust for compass variance.
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, your
compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the compass/temperature button
for six seconds until a zone number appears in
the display.
2-42
3. Press the compass/temperature button on the
bottom of the mirror until the new zone number
appears in the display. After you stop pressing
the button, the display will show a compass
direction within a few seconds.
Cleaning the Mirror
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner
to enter the mirror housing.
Outside Power Mirrors
The outside power mirror
controls are located on
the driver’s door.
To adjust the power mirrors, do the following:
1. Press the left side of the selector switch to choose
the driver side mirror. Press the right side of the
selector switch to choose the passenger side mirror.
2. Use the round, four-way control pad to move
the mirror in the desired direction.
If the mirror begins making a ratcheting sound, the
mirror has reached the end of its travel and can go no
farther in that direction. To stop the sound, reverse
the mirror direction using the control pad.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash
or confined space. Pull the mirror toward the vehicle to
fold. To return the mirror to its original position, push
outward. Be sure to return both mirrors to the unfolded
position before driving.
2-43
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s
surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,
look farther away than they really are.
Object Detection Systems
Rear Vision Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear vision camera
system. Read this entire section before using the
camera system.
The rear vision camera system is designed to help the
driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area
behind the vehicle. When the driver shifts the vehicle into
REVERSE (R), the video screen will automatically slide
out from the rear view mirror. Once the driver shifts out of
REVERSE (R), the video screen will slide back into the
rear view mirror after a delay.
The display has a guideline overlay that can help the
driver align the vehicle when backing into a parking spot.
To turn off the rear vision camera system, do the
following:
1. Place the vehicle shift lever in PARK (P).
2. Turn the ignition key to the ACCESSORY position.
3. Press the right mirror button briefly; the right
green light indicator will turn off. The rear camera
vision display is now disabled.
2-44
To turn on the rear camera vision feature again, press
the right mirror button briefly. The green light indicator
will illuminate. The rear camera vision system is
now enabled and the display will slide out from the
mirror normally.
To manually slide out the rear camera screen for
cleaning, do the following:
1. Place the vehicle shift lever in PARK (P).
2. Turn the ignition key to the ACCESSORY or
RUN position.
3. Press and hold the right mirror button for
five seconds. The display will slide out from
the mirror for 30 seconds; the right green LED
indicator will remain illuminated. The camera
screen will not be on when it slides out of
the mirror.
4. If additional time is required for cleaning,
repeat step 3.
To resume normal operation, press the right button
momentarily while the rear camera screen is out or wait
30 seconds for screen to slide back into the mirror.
For more information on the automatic dimming,
compass, and temperature features of the mirror, see
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass
and Temperature Display on page 2-41.
{CAUTION:
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) system does
not replace driver vision. RVC does not:
•Detect objects that are outside the
camera’s field of view, below the bumper,
or underneath the vehicle.
•Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
or pets.
Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the
rear vision camera screen, or use the screen
during longer, higher speed backing maneuvers
or where there could be cross-traffic. Your
judged distances using the screen will differ
from actual distances.
So if you do not use proper care before backing
up, you could hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in vehicle damage,
injury, or death. Even though the vehicle has
the RVC system, always check carefully before
backing up by checking behind your vehicle.
2-45
Area Displayed On Screen
The image is provided by the camera located on the
rear bumper.
The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen differs from the actual
distance. The area displayed by the camera is limited.
The camera does not display objects which are close
to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper.
The spare tire and carrier extends rearward of the rear
bumper. The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to vehicle orientation or road conditions.
Notice: The spare tire extends farther away from
rear of the vehicle than the trailer hitch shown
on rear vision camera display. Your spare tire could
hit an object even though there appears to be
enough distance on the display between the trailer
hitch and objects behind you causing vehicle or
property damage. Do not use this system to judge
the distance between the spare tire and objects
behind you.
The following illustration shows the field of view that
the camera provides.
2-46
When the System Does Not Seem To
Work Properly
The rear vision camera system may not work properly
or display a clear image in the following situations:
•In the dark.
•When the sun or the beam of headlights is shining
directly into the camera lens.
•If ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on
the camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft cloth.
•If the back of the vehicle is in an accident, the
position and mounting angle of the camera
may change or the camera may be affected.
Be sure to have the camera and its position
and mounting angle checked at your dealer.
•Extreme high or low temperatures or extreme
temperature changes can affect the image
displayed.
2-47
OnStar
®
System
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services.
If your airbags deploy, the system is designed to
make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors
who can request emergency services be sent to
your location. If you lock your keys in the vehicle,
call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send
a signal to unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar button and they can
contact Roadside Service for you.
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your
OnStar service at any time by contacting OnStar
as provided below. A complete OnStar Owner’s Guide
and the OnStar Terms and Conditions are included
in the vehicle’s OnStar Subscriber glove box literature.
For more information, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)
or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button
to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar, the Safe &
Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections Plan
is included for one year from the date of purchase.
You can extend this plan beyond the first year, or
upgrade to the Directions & Connections Plan.
For more information, press the OnStar button to
speak with an advisor. Some OnStar services (such
as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location
Assistance) may not be available until you register
with OnStar.
2-48
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
•Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
•Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
•Link to Emergency Services
•Roadside Assistance
•Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
•AccidentAssist
•Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
•OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
•GM Goodwrench
®
On Demand Diagnostics
•OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
•OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections Plan
•All Safe and Sound Plan Services
•Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
•RideAssist
•Information and Convenience Services
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also
be linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the
U.S. or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada,
depending on eligibility. To find out more, refer to
the OnStar Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box,
visit www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak
with an OnStar advisor by pressing the OnStar button
or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and
stock quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving
a few simple voice commands, you can browse
through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information. (Only available in the
continental U.S.)
2-49
Additional OnStar Controls
Your vehicle may have
a button, located on
the driver’s side of the
instrument panel, that
can be used to interact
with OnStar.
Use this button to dial numbers into voicemail systems
or to dial phone number extensions. See the OnStar
Owner’s Guide for more information.
How OnStar Service Works
In order to provide you with OnStar services, your
vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability of recording
and transmitting vehicle information. This information
is automatically sent to an OnStar Call Center at
the time of an OnStar button press, Emergency button
press or if your airbags or AACN system deploys.
The vehicle information usually includes your GPS
location and, in the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the accident that your vehicle
has been involved in (e.g. the direction from which
your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual Advisor
feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle
also sends OnStar your GPS location so that we
can provide you with location-based services.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless you are in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for
that area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas, or at all times.
OnStar service that involves location information about
your vehicle cannot work unless GPS satellite signals
are unobstructed and available in that place as well.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of
your vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
2-50
Your Responsibility
You may need to increase the volume of your radio
to hear the OnStar advisor. If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, this means that your system is not
functioning properly and should be checked by a dealer.
If the light appears clear (no light is appearing), your
OnStar subscription has expired. You can always press
the blue OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar
equipment is active.
Universal Home Remote
System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The FCC Grant of Equipment Authorization Certificate
number is CB2SAHL3.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The Canadian Registration ID number is 2791021849A.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
2-51
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED)
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)
indicator light above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming
the Universal Home Remote.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
in this section.
When programming a garage door, park outside of
the garage. Park directly in line with and facing
the garage door opener motor-head or gate motor-head.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate you are programming.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
2-52
Programming the Universal Home
Remote System
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515
or go to www.homelink.com.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat
the procedure.
To program up to three devices:
1. From inside the vehicle, press and hold down the
two outside buttons at the same time, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote indicator
light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step
will erase the factory settings or all previously
programmed buttons.
Do not hold down the buttons for longer than
30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program
the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons.
2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Universal
Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied
by the manufacturer of your garage door opener
receiver (motor head unit).
3. At the same time, press and hold both the
Universal Home Remote button that you would
like to use to control the garage door and the
hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the
Universal Home Remote button or the hand-held
transmitter button until Step 4 has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require you to substitute Step 3 with the
procedure noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after
Universal Home Remote successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
2-53
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
the programming is complete and your garage door
should move when the Universal Home Remote
button is pressed and released. You do not need to
continue the programming Steps 6 through 8 and
can stop here.
If the Universal Home Remote indicator light blinks
rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with the programming
Steps 6 through 8.
It may be helpful to have another person available
to assist with the remaining steps.
6. After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed,
locate inside the garage the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
2-54
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete Step 8.
8. Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press
and hold the Universal Home Remote button,
chosen in Step 3 to control the garage door, for
two seconds, and then release it. If the garage door
does not move, press and hold the same button
a second time for two seconds, and then release it.
Again, if the door does not move, press and hold
the same button a third time for two seconds,
and then release.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
the garage door.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming
the Universal Home Remote System.” Do not repeat
Step 1, as this will erase all previous programming
from the Universal Home Remote buttons.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515
or go to www.homelink.com.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal during
programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate operators
are manufactured to time out in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace
Step 3 under “Programming Universal Home Remote”
with the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
2-55
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
Erase the programmed buttons when you sell or
terminate your lease.
To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal
Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote
buttons, repeat the programming instructions earlier
in this section, beginning with Step 2.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-5.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the
handle upward.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle may have two cupholders in front of
the front armrest storage area. You may also have
a cupholder in the center of the rear bench seat.
Pull down on the lid to open the cupholder.
2-56
Front Seat Storage Net
Your vehicle has storage nets located on the back of
the front seats. To remove these nets, pull out on each
of the four clips located on the net.
Front Armrest Storage Area
Your vehicle has a front armrest storage area. To open,
lift the latch on the front of the armrest and pull up.
Luggage Carrier
If your vehicle has this feature, you can load cargo on
your vehicle.
The luggage carrier consists of siderails attached to
the roof. The crossrails attach into the siderails and
can be moved back and forth to accommodate various
cargo sizes.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier
that weighs more than 250 lbs. (113 kg) or hangs
over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage
your vehicle. Load cargo only on top of the
crossrails and tie the cargo down to the crossrail
support cargo tie-down loops, making sure to
fasten it securely
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-42.
Adjusting the Crossrails
To adjust the crossrails to fit your load:
1. Use the provided crossrail key to unlock the
crossrail end cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2-57
2. Remove the end cap. 3. Pull the lever labeled “PULL” from left to right to
loosen the crossrail.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to the opposite end of
the crossrail.
5. Once both sides of the crossrail are loose, adjust
the crossrail to the desired position.
6. Push the lever labeled “PULL” from right to left to
lock the crossrail in place.
7. Reinstall end cap and lock by turning the key
clockwise.
8. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 to the opposite end of
the crossrail.
2-58
Stop Tabs
If your vehicle has a sunroof, it will have a crossrail stop
tab placed in the siderail. This tab prevents you from
moving the crossrails past the opening of the sunroof
and loading cargo too far forward.
Your vehicle may have cargo tie downs. Once you
load the cargo onto the crossrails, secure it by tying it
down to the cargo tie downs. Do not load cargo directly
on the roof of your vehicle. See Cargo Tie Downs on
page 2-59 for more information.
Rear Storage Area
Your vehicle has a rear storage area located on
the passenger’s side of the cargo area. To open,
pull the two tabs out and open lid.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear
of the vehicle. Put small loads behind the net. The net
is not for heavier loads. Store them as far forward
as you can.
Cargo Cover
Notice: If you put items onto the cargo cover, the
weight of the items could cause the attachment clips
to break. You would no longer be able to attach
and use the cargo cover. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Never put anything
on top of the cargo cover.
If your vehicle has a cargo cover, you can use it to
cover items in the rear of the vehicle. Remove the
cover from its pouch and place the loops found on
each corner of the cover, over the two pegs in each
corner of the rear if the vehicle. When it is not in
use, fold up the cover and return it to the pouch.
Cargo Tie Downs
Your vehicle may have four cargo tie-downs. These
tie-downs are located in tracks on the roof of the vehicle.
Each tie-down can be moved to anywhere on the
track. To loosen, turn the tie-down counterclockwise
until it moves freely in the track. To tighten, turn
the tie-down clockwise.
2-59
Sunroof
To operate a power sliding sunroof, the ignition must be
on, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-20.
The switch used to
operate the sunroof is
located in the headliner.
Open/Close: Press and release the back of the switch
to fully open the sunroof. If the sunshade is in the
closed position, it automatically opens with the sunroof.
To stop the sunroof before it reaches the full open
position press and release the front or back of the switch.
An air deflector raises when the sunroof is fully opened.
Press the front of the switch to close the sunroof.
Vent: With the sunroof closed, press and hold the front
of the switch to vent the sunroof. To stop the sunroof
before it reaches its full vent position, release the switch.
Press and hold the back of the switch to close.
Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time.
Debris may collect in the tracks.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade automatically opens with the sunroof,
but can be manually pulled shut after the sunroof
is closed.
To adjust the sunshade, push it backward or pull it
forward to the desired position. The sunshade cannot
be adjusted further than the current closed position
of the sunroof.
2-60
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Wipers ........................................3-10
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-11
Cruise Control ..............................................3-11
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-15
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-16
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-17
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-17
Off-Road Lamps ...........................................3-18
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-19
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-19
Dome Lamp .................................................3-19
Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-20
Exit Lighting .................................................3-20
Reading Lamps ............................................3-20
Electric Power Management ...........................3-20
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-20
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-21
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-22
Climate Controls ............................................3-22
Climate Control System .................................3-22
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-24
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-25
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-26
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-27
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-27
Tachometer .................................................3-27
Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-28
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-29
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-30
Charging System Light ..................................3-32
Up-Shift Light ...............................................3-32
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-33
Antilock Brake System Warning Light ...............3-34
Traction Off Light ..........................................3-34
StabiliTrak
®
Not Ready Light ..........................3-34
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-35
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-35
Section 3 Instrument Panel
3-1
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-36
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-38
Security Light ...............................................3-39
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-39
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-39
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-40
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-40
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-40
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-43
Audio System(s) .............................................3-48
Setting the Time ...........................................3-48
Radio(s) ......................................................3-49
XM Radio Messages .....................................3-60
Navigation/Radio System ...............................3-61
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-61
Radio Reception ...........................................3-61
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-62
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-62
Section 3 Instrument Panel
3-2
✍NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
Automatic Transmission shown, Manual Transmission similar
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-24.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn Signal/
Multifunction Lever on page 3-7. Windshield
Washer/Wiper. See Windshield Wipers on page 3-10
and Windshield Washer on page 3-10. Cruise
Controls. See Cruise Control on page 3-11.
C. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.
D. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-26.
E. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
F. All-Wheel Drive, Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator,
Locking Rear Axle, and Traction Control System/
StabiliTrak
®
Buttons. See Full-Time Four-Wheel
Drive on page 2-27,Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-30,Locking Rear Axle on
page 4-6,Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-5 and StabiliTrak
®
System on page 4-7.
G. Exterior Lamps Control, Dome Override Button,
Instrument Panel Brightness Control, Fog Lamp
Button, and OnStar
®
Button. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-15,Dome Lamp Override on page 3-20,
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-19,
Fog Lamps on page 3-19, and OnStar
®
System on
page 2-48.
H. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake on
page 2-32.
I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-48.
J. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-22.
K. Rear Washer/Wiper Control. See Rear Window
Wiper/Washer on page 3-11.
L. Off-Road Lamps Buttons. See Off-Road Lamps on
page 3-18.
M. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 2-23 or Manual Transmission Operation
on page 2-26.
N. Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-21.
O. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-56.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the police and
others that you have a problem. The front and rear
turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
towards the center of
the instrument panel.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals do not work.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position the key is in, and even if the key is not in the
ignition switch.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your
vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on the
steering wheel pad.
3-6
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows the steering wheel to be adjusted
before driving. It can be raised to allow more room for
the driver to enter and exit the vehicle.
The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steering
column, under the turn signal lever.
To tilt, hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt lever
toward you. Move the wheel to a comfortable level, then
release the tilt lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
•GTurn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
•53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9.
•Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-9.
•NWindshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on
page 3-10.
•LWindshield Washer. See Windshield Washer
on page 3-10.
•JCruise Control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-11.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has one upward (for right) and
one downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will automatically
return to the off position.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever until
the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until the change is
completed. The lever will return by itself when released.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers will not see your
vehicle’s turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when signaling
a turn, check for a burned-out bulb or a blown fuse.
For bulb replacement, see Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps on page 5-50. For a
blown fuse or circuit breaker, see Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-102
Turn Signal On Chime
If a turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal and the message TURN SIGNAL will also appear
in the DIC. To turn the chime and message off, move
the turn signal lever to the off position.
See “TURN SIGNAL” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-43 DIC Warnings and Messages
for more information.
3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, push
the lever toward the instrument panel. To return
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on. They
will stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster
will come on. Release the lever to return to normal
operation.
3-9
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
8(Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single wiping
cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let
go. The wipers will stop after one wipe. Hold the band
on mist longer, if more wipes are needed.
N(Delay): The wiper speed can be set for long
or short delays between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the
delay time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
6(Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid position
past the delay settings.
1(High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn the
band to the second solid position past the delay settings.
9(Off): Move the band to off, to stop the wipers.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do
become worn or damaged, get new blades or blade
inserts.
Windshield wipers work in all power modes, except
when set to LOCK. After the engine is turned off, wipers
will work in Retained Accessory Power (RAP) mode
until a door is opened. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 2-20.
Windshield Washer
L(Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the
paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then either
stop or return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-10
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
This knob is located on the
instrument panel below the
climate controls.
Z(Rear Wiper): Turn the knob to 1 for a slower
wiping speed or to 2 for a faster wiping speed.
0 (Off): Turn the knob to 0 for off.
=(Washer Fluid): To wash and wipe the window,
press the button within the knob with this symbol.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If the windshield can be washed, but not the rear
windows, check the fluid level.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
R(On): This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
rT (Set): Press this button to set the speed.
3-11
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
The cruise control disengages, if the vehicle has the
Traction Control System (TCS) and it begins to
limit wheel spin. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-5. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you can turn cruise control back on.
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise symbol on the
instrument panel comes on
when the cruise control
is engaged.
3-12
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake or step on the clutch.
This, of course, disengages the cruise control. But you
do not need to reset it.
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
The vehicle will go back to the chosen speed and
stays there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. Do not hold the switch at resume/
accelerate, unless you want the vehicle to go faster.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
•Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You will now cruise at the higher speed.
If the accelerator pedal is held longer than
60 seconds, cruise control will turn off.
•Move the cruise switch from on to resume/
accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to the
speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each
time you do this, your vehicle goes about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.
3-13
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
•Press and hold the set button until you reach the
desired lower speed, then release it.
•To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you will go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle
slows down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control works on hills depends
upon your speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift
to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down. Of
course, applying the brake turns off the cruise control.
Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not
use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:
•Step lightly on the brake pedal.
•Move the cruise control switch to off.
•Lightly tap or press the clutch, if you have a manual
transmission.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, the
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-14
Exterior Lamps
The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel
operates the exterior lamps.
O(Exterior Lamps): Turn the knob, located to the
right of this symbol, to choose one of the four exterior
lamp positions.
O(Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn off all
exterior lamps, including the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL). This is a momentary control that springs
back to AUTO when released. Vehicles first sold in
Canada do not have the DRL disable feature available.
Vehicles first sold in Canada cannot turn off the DRL
unless the following conditions are met:
•The vehicle has an automatic transmission.
•The gear position is in PARK (P).
•The headlamp switch is turned to the Off position.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the knob to this position
to automatically turn on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the following:
•Sidemarker Lamps
•Taillamps
•Parking Lamps
•Instrument Panel Lights
Due to the momentary switch design, the automatic
headlamps may be disabled even if the control is in the
AUTO position.
To enable automatic lighting, do any of the following:
•Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off
and release the control. It will return back to
the AUTO position by itself.
•Turn the headlamp control from the parking lamp or
headlamp position to AUTO.
3-15
To disable automatic lighting, do any of the following:
•Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to off
and release the control. It will return back to
the AUTO position by itself.
•Turn the headlamp control from AUTO to the
parking lamp or headlamp position.
See Automatic Headlamp System on page 3-17 for
more information.
Vehicles first sold in Canada with an automatic
transmission cannot turn off automatic headlamps
unless the gear position is in PARK (P) and the
headlamp switch is turned to the Off position. Vehicles
first sold in Canada with a manual transmission can
turn off the automatic headlamps with the headlamp
control; however, the parking lamps will remain on.
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the knob to this position to
turn on the parking lamps, together with the following:
•Sidemarker Lamps
•Taillamps
•License Plate Lamps
•Instrument Panel Lights
2(Headlamps): Turn the knob to this position to turn
on the headlamps, together with the previously listed
lamps and lights.
The headlamps can be switched from low to high beam
by pushing the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
the instrument panel.
Headlamps on Reminder
A headlamp reminder chime will sound if the following
conditions are met:
•The driver door is open.
•Parking lamps or headlamps are manually
turned on.
•The key is either not in the ignition switch, or it is in
the LOCK position of the ignition switch.
The headlamp reminder cannot be turned off if the
conditions listed above are met.
In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn off once the
ignition is in ACC.
3-16
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
•The ignition is on.
•The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
•The transmission is not in PARK (P) if you have an
automatic transmission.
•The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL are on, no other lamps are on. The
instrument panel will not be lit up either. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, if parking lamps are manually turned
on, DRL will stay on.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
To turn off the DRL, see Exterior Lamps on page 3-15.
Vehicles first sold in Canada cannot turn off DRL unless
certain conditions are met. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-15.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic headlamp
system will turn on after the transmission has been
shifted from PARK (P) to DRIVE (D). The headlamps,
taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps, roof marker lamps,
and the instrument panel lights will turn on at normal
brightness. The radio lights will become more dim when
the headlights are off compared to when the headlights
are on.
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered, or the
system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp system so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights
does not affect the system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system will only be affected when the
light sensor detects a change in lighting lasting longer
than the delay.
3-17
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take about one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is
light outside. During that delay, the instrument panel
cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure
the instrument panel brightness control is in the full
bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightness
on page 3-19.
Off-Road Lamps
The off-road lamps, if the vehicle has them, provide
auxiliary lighting when the vehicle is used off road.
These lamps are not intended to be used in place of
existing vehicle lighting. The lamps are not to be used
on any public street or highway and are to be covered
when not in use. Check your state and local laws before
installing or using any auxiliary lighting. In some
states it may be necessary to remove the roof lamps
when operating the vehicle on the highway.
The switches for the off-road lamps are located in the
center of the instrument panel below the climate
controls. One switch is used for the front lower-grille
mounted off-road lamps, if the vehicle has them, and the
other switch is used for the roof-mounted off-road
lamps, if the vehicle has them.
To use the lamps, remove the covers from the lamps and
press the switch to turn them on or off. An indicator light
on the switch will turn on when the lamps are on.
Notice: Turning on the off-road lamps before
removing the lamp covers could damage the
off-road lamps and the covers. Always remove the
covers before turning on the off-road lamps.
The off-road lamps remain on even after the ignition is
turned off. The off-road lamp switch must be pressed
to turn them off.
Roof Mounted Off-Road
Light Switch Lower Grille Off-Road
Light Switch
3-18
Fog Lamps
Your vehicle has fog lamps. You can use them for
better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking
lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must be on for
your fog lamps to work.
The fog lamp button is
located in the exterior
lamps control.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on while the
headlamps or parking lamps are on. Press the button
again to turn them off. An indicator light will glow in the
button when the fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
in the dark without turning on the headlamps.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Instrument Panel Brightness
D(Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to
the exterior lamp control.
Turn the thumbwheel up or down to brighten or dim the
instrument panel lights and the radio display. The
instrument panel lights, cluster, and radio display do not
dim to complete darkness. Turn the thumbwheel all
the way up to turn the dome lamps on.
Dome Lamp
The dome and footwell lamps come on when any door
is opened. The dome lamps are located in the cargo
and front area of the vehicle.
The dome and footwell lamps can be turned on by
turning the thumbwheel, located next to the exterior
lamps control, all the way up. In this position, the lamps
remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
3-19
Dome Lamp Override
E(Dome Lamp Override): You can use the dome
override button, located below the exterior lamps control,
to set the dome and footwell lamps to come on
automatically when a door is opened, or to remain off.
To turn the lamps off, press the button into the in
position. With the button in this position, the dome lamps
will remain off when the doors are open. To return the
lamps to automatic operation, press the button again
and return it to the out position. With the button in this
position, the dome lamps will come on when you
open a door.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. The lamps will not
come on if the dome override button is pressed in.
Reading Lamps
Your vehicle has reading lamps. Press the button
located next to the lamp to turn them on or off.
These lamps will not come on with the dome lamps.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery’s temperature and state of
charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance
and extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in. When
the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly
to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a voltmeter
gage, you may see the voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be
spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power
that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamp if it is left on for
more than 20 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK. This
will help prevent your battery from running down.
3-20
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle has accessory power outlets.
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
Your vehicle has two accessory power outlets located on
the lower part of the instrument panel below the climate
control system and there may be one located in the rear
cargo area. A small cap must be pulled down to access
an accessory power outlet. When not using an outlet, be
sure to cover it with the protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always
unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-21
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Your ashtray is located in your center console area.
The ashtray can be removed for cleaning. When
the ashtray is removed, this area can also be used as a
cupholder.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation of the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
Temperature: Turn the left knob on the control panel to
adjust the temperature of the air in the vehicle. Turn
the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the temperature.
#(Air Conditioning): Press the center of the left
knob on the control panel to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light on the button will be
lit when the air conditioning is turned on. This system
cools and dehumidifies the air entering the vehicle.
3-22
The air conditioning will not function if the fan is turned
off. If air conditioning is selected with fan off, the
indicator light flashes three times and then turns off.
A slight change in engine performance may occur when
the air conditioning compressor shuts off and turns
on again. This is normal. The system is designed
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
still maintaining the selected temperature.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so sometimes there may be a small amount of
water dripping underneath the vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
9(Fan): Turn the center knob on the control panel to
control the fan speed. Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
9(Off): Turn the center knob to this position to turn
the fan off. With the fan off, you may still experience
airflow from the system that increases with vehicle
speed depending on the mode and temperature settings.
Enable recirculation mode to stop this airflow from
occurring.
@(Recirculation): Press the center of the fan
control knob to recirculate air inside the vehicle and
prevent outside air from coming in. It can be used
to prevent outside odors from entering the vehicle and
cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly. Press
this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off. An
indicator light on the button comes on to show that
the recirculation mode is activated.
Recirculation is available in the bi-level, and vent
modes. Recirculation is not available while in floor,
floor/defog and defrost mode. If recirculation is selected
in these modes, the indicator flashes three times
indicating it is not available in that mode. When the
recirculation mode is turned on, the air conditioning turns
on automatically.
When it is hot enough outside, the recirculation mode
may turn on automatically to help improve cooling
performance. The indicator light will be lit to show this
mode is active. If the recirculation button is pressed
while in this mode, the light will flash three times
and stay on to indicate that recirculation may not be
shut off.
The right knob on the control panel is used to direct the
airflow inside the vehicle. In-between modes are
available by moving the right control knob between
modes with symbols. The in-between mode is a
combination of the two modes that the control is
centered between.
Turn the right knob to select one of the following modes:
H(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
3-23
\(Bi-Level): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets, and the remaining air to the floor
outlets and the defroster and side window outlets.
Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer
air to the floor outlets.
[(Floor): This mode directs air to the floor outlets,
side window outlets, and defroster. Recirculation is
not available in this mode.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from
the windshield and side windows. Use the defog mode
to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost
from the windshield more quickly. For best results, clear
all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.
/(Floor/Defog): This mode directs the air to the
windshield, the side window outlets, and to the
floor outlets. When this mode is selected, the system
runs the air conditioning system unless the outside
temperature is near freezing or below. Recirculation is
not available in this mode.
0(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, and the side window outlets. When this
mode is selected, the system runs the air conditioning
system unless the outside temperature is near or below
freezing. Recirculation is not available in this mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window when the key
is in the ignition and turned to ON/RUN.
=(Rear Defogger): Press the center of the right
knob on the control panel to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. First press of this button activates
the rear window defogger for 15 minutes and each
subsequent activation lasts seven and one-half minutes.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to
the defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the
direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle.
3-24
Move the louvers up or down to change the direction of
the airflow. Use the thumbwheel under the outlets to
change the direction of the airflow from left to right.
Operation Tips
•Enable recirculation mode for maximum air
conditioning performance.
•Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
•Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
•Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As the
details show on the next few pages, some warning lights
come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you
know they are working. If you are familiar with this
section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when there is
a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on as
you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that tells you what
to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting
to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous. So
please get to know your vehicle’s warning lights and
gages. They can be a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center
(DIC) that works along with the warning lights and gages.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-40 for
more information.
3-25
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive
safely and economically.
United States 3.7L L5 Automatic Transmission version shown, 5.3L V8, Canada and Manual
Transmission similar
3-26
Speedometer and Odometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running by pressing the trip information stem.
See “Odometer” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-40 for more information.
If the cluster is replaced the new one will automatically
detect and update the vehicle’s accumulated mileage.
Trip Odometer
Your vehicle has a trip odometer that can tell you how
far your vehicle has been driven since you last set
the trip odometer to zero.
See “Trip Odometer” under DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-40 for more information.
Tachometer
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
3.7L L5 Shown,
5.3L V8 Similar
3-27
Safety Belt Reminders
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
will sound for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This would only
occur if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 1-62 for more information.
The passenger safety belt light, located on the
instrument panel, will come on and stay on for
several seconds and then flash for several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-28
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 1-54.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
The light should go out
and the system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start
the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly. Have
your vehicle serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you start the engine. If the light does not
come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a
problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also come on.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-43 for
more information.
3-29
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will
light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to
let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
United States Canada
3-30
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child restraints
be secured in the rear seat, even if the airbag
is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-62
for more on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more on this, including
important safety information.
3-31
Charging System Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition, but the engine
is not running, as a
check to show you it
is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also
appear. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-43
for more information. This light could indicate that you
have problems with a generator drive belt, or another
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If
you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Up-Shift Light
Your vehicle may have an
up-shift light.
When this light comes on, you should shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions allow
you to.
See Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-26 for
more information.
3-32
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 2-32 for more information.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-48.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
United States Canada
3-33
Antilock Brake System Warning
Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light will come
on briefly when you
start the engine.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it
is safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have antilock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-33
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-43 for all
brake related DIC messages.
Traction Off Light
If you have the Traction
Control System (TCS), this
light will come on when the
TCS has been turned off.
This light will come on briefly when the ignition is turned
to ON, if it does not the system may require service.
For more information on the traction off light, see
Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-5.
StabiliTrak
®
Not Ready Light
If you have the StabiliTrak
®
system, this light will come
on when the StabiliTrak
®
system has been
turned off.
This light will come on briefly when the ignition is turned
to ON, if it does not the system may require service.
For more information, see StabiliTrak
®
System on
page 4-7.
3-34
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer is in the shaded area of the gage,
the engine is too hot. It means that your engine coolant
has overheated. If you have been operating your
vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull
off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine
as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-29 for more
information.
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
This light will also come on when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), may accompany the light. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-43 for more
information.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do so.
If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See
Tires on page 5-54 for more information.
If a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor
System, this light will flash for approximately
60 seconds and then stay on solid for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-63 for more information.
United States Canada
3-35
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It makes
sure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate
that there is an OBD II
problem and service
is required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light also comes on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
•Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be
required.
•Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
3-36
If the Light is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
•Reduce vehicle speed.
•Avoid hard accelerations.
•Avoid steep uphill grades.
•If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that might have developed.
3-37
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your dealer/retailer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
This light will come on
briefly when you start your
engine. If it does not,
have your vehicle serviced.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
is not flowing through your engine properly. You
could be low on oil and you might have some other
system problem.
3-38
Security Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-14.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 3-11 for more information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9
for more information.
3-39
Fuel Gage
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have remaining in the fuel tank.
Here are three things that some owners ask about. None
of these indicate a problem with your fuel gage:
•At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
•It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
•The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
When the fuel in the fuel tank is low, you will see a
LOW FUEL message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-43 for more information.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) displays information
such as the trip odometer, personalization features,
and warning messages. The DIC display is located on
the instrument panel cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when the
ignition is on.
If a problem is detected, a warning message appears
on the display. Pressing and releasing the trip odometer
reset stem on the DIC acknowledges some current
warnings or service messages. Some messages only
clear after the required action has been taken.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the trip odometer reset stem on the DIC.
These modes are explained in the following section.
The DIC trip odometer reset stem is located on
the instrument panel cluster next to the DIC display.
To scroll through the available functions, press
and release the reset stem.
United States Canada
3-40
Trip Information
Odometer
The odometer is automatically displayed on the DIC
when you start the vehicle. The odometer shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either
miles for the United States or kilometers for Canada.
Trip Odometer
Press and release the reset stem until TRIP appears on
the DIC display. The trip odometer shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset of the trip odometer
in either miles for the United States or kilometers for
Canada.
To reset the trip odometer, press and hold the reset
stem until the display returns to zero.
Engine Oil Life System
With the engine off, turn the key to ON/RUN and
then press the reset stem until OIL LIFE RESET
appears — alternating between OIL LIFE and
RESET — on the DIC display. The CHANGE OIL
message alerts you to change the oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions. Always reset the
OIL LIFE message after an oil change. To reset the
message, see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
Oil on page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more information.
Language
This feature allows you to choose the language in which
the DIC display shows information.
To set your choice for this feature:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to ON/RUN, but do
not start the engine.
2. Close all doors so the DOORS message does not
display in the DIC.
3. Momentarily press and release the reset stem until
the current language is displayed: English (default),
Spanish, or French.
4. To select a different language, press and hold the
reset stem until the next language appears.
5. Repeat Step 4 until the desired language is
displayed. Once the desired language is shown on
the DIC display, the language is set.
6. To exit the language selection, momentarily press
and release the reset stem. All DIC messages will
now display in the language selected.
3-41
Automatic Door Locks
This feature allows you to program the door locks to a
preferred setting.
To set your choice for this feature:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
Do not remove the key from the ignition.
2. Press and hold the power door lock button until the
DIC display shows the current door lock mode.
3. To view the next available mode, press and hold
the reset stem until the mode appears. Release
the reset stem and press and hold again to view the
next mode.
4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DIC
display, briefly press the reset stem to set your
choice. The DIC display then clears.
The following are the available modes:
Lock 1 (default): On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, this mode locks all of the doors when the
vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P) and unlocks all of
the doors when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode locks
all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and unlocks all of the doors
when the key is removed from the ignition.
Lock 2: On vehicles with an automatic transmission,
this mode locks all of the doors when the vehicle
is shifted out of PARK (P) and unlocks the driver’s door
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode
locks all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h) and unlocks the driver’s door
when the key is removed from the ignition.
Lock 3: On vehicles with an automatic transmission,
this mode locks all of the doors when the vehicle
is shifted out of PARK (P). The doors will not
automatically unlock.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode
locks all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater
than 15 mph (24 km/h). The doors will not automatically
unlock.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Feedback
This feature allows you to program the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) feedback to a preferred setting.
To set your choice for this feature:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
Do not remove the key from the ignition.
2. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
RKE transmitter at the same time. Hold both
buttons until the DIC display shows the current RKE
feedback mode.
3-42
3. To view the next available mode, press and hold
the reset stem until the mode appears. Release
the reset stem and press and hold again to view the
next mode.
4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DIC
display, briefly press the reset stem to set your
choice. The DIC display then clears.
The following are the available modes:
RFA 1 (default): This mode flashes the parking lamps
when you press the lock or unlock buttons on the
RKE transmitter.
RFA 2: This mode flashes the parking lamps and
sounds the horn when you press the lock button on the
RKE transmitter. This mode also flashes the parking
lamps when you press the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter.
RFA 3: This mode flashes the parking lamps and
sounds the horn when you press the lock or unlock
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
RFA 4: This mode disables RKE feedback. There will
be no feedback when you press the lock or unlock
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
DIC Warnings and Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the
driver that the status of the vehicle has changed
and that some action may be needed by the driver to
correct the condition. Multiple messages may appear
one after another. The messages are displayed for
several seconds each.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you should press and release the trip odometer reset
stem to acknowledge that you received the messages
and to clear them from the display. Each message must
be acknowledged individually.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages only makes
the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
3-43
AC (Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too high and the air conditioning in your
vehicle needs to be turned off. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-29 and Climate Control System on
page 3-22 for more information. This message displays
along with the ENG HOT message.
ABS (Antilock Brake System) FAULT
This message displays if there is a problem with
the Antilock Brake System (ABS). Check the ABS as
soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. See Brakes on page 5-38 and Antilock
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-34 for more
information. Press and release the reset stem to
acknowledge the message and clear it from the display.
BRAKES
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brakes. Check the brakes as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. See
Brakes on page 5-38 and Brake System Warning Light
on page 3-33 for more information. Press and release
the reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it
from the display.
CHANGE OIL
This message displays when the oil needs to be
changed. Check the oil in your vehicle as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. See Engine Oil on page 5-15 and
Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more
information. Press and release the reset stem to
acknowledge the message and clear it from the display.
DOORS
This message displays when one or more of the doors
is ajar. Check all the doors on your vehicle to make
sure they are closed. The message clears from
the display after all of the doors are closed.
ENG (Engine) HOT
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is hot. Check the engine coolant
temperature gage. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 3-35. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible if you suspect the
engine is overheating. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-29 for more information.
3-44
FLUID
This message displays if the brake fluid is low. Check
the brake fluid as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. See Brakes on
page 5-38 for more information. Press and release
the reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it
from the display.
FUEL CAP
This message displays if the vehicle’s fuel cap is either
off or loose. Pull over as soon as possible and check
to see if the fuel cap is secure. You may also see
the check engine light on the instrument panel cluster.
If the check engine light does come on when the
fuel cap was loose, it may take a few driving trips before
the light turns off. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-36 for more information if the light still remains
on. Press and release the reset stem to acknowledge
the message and clear it from the display.
LOW FUEL
This message displays if the level of fuel in the vehicle
is low. Also check the fuel gage. See Fuel Gage on
page 3-40 for more information. Refill the fuel tank as
soon as possible.
LOW TIRE
This message displays if a low tire pressure is detected
in any of the vehicle’s tires. Press and release the reset
stem to acknowledge the message and clear it from the
display. The message appears at each ignition cycle until
the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. See
Tires on page 5-54 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-62 for more information on tires and the correct
inflation pressures.
OIL
This message displays when the oil pressure is low.
See Oil Pressure Light on page 3-38 and Engine Oil
on page 5-15 for more information.
PARK BRK (Brake)
This message displays when the parking brake is set.
See Parking Brake on page 2-32 and Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-33 for more information. The
message clears from the display after the parking brake
is released or by pressing and releasing the reset stem.
3-45
REDUCED POWER
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine power
is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to
your destination. The performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be
driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to
your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
Press and release the reset stem to acknowledge the
message and clear it from the display.
SERV (Service) 4WD (Four-Wheel
Drive)
This message displays when there is a problem with the
transfer case control system. Check the transfer case
on your vehicle and have it serviced by your
dealer/retailer. See Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive on
page 2-27 for more information about the transfer case.
Press and release the reset stem to acknowledge
the message and clear it from the display.
SERV (Service) TPM (Tire Pressure
Monitor)
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on
page 3-35. Several conditions may cause this message
to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 5-65 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERV (Service) VEH (Vehicle)
This message displays if your vehicle needs service.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer
as soon as possible.
3-46
SERVICE CHARG (Charge) SYS
(System)
This message displays if there is a problem with the
battery charging system. Under certain conditions, the
battery warning light may also turn on in the instrument
panel cluster. See Charging System Light on
page 3-32. The battery will not be charging at an
optimal rate and the vehicle will lose the ability to enter
the fuel economy mode. The vehicle is safe to drive,
however have the electrical system checked by
your dealer/retailer. Press and release the reset stem
to acknowledge the message and clear it from the
display.
SERVICE STAB (Stability) SYS
(System)
This message displays if there is a problem with the
StabiliTrak
®
system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. See StabiliTrak
®
System on page 4-7
for more information.
STAB (Stability) SYS (System) OFF
This message displays when the StabiliTrak
®
system is
turned off. See StabiliTrak
®
System on page 4-7 for
more information.
TRAC (Traction) OFF
This message along with the traction off light displays
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned off by
pressing the TCS button. See Traction Off Light on
page 3-34 and Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 4-5 for more information.
TRACTION FAULT
This message displays if there is a problem with the
Traction Control System (TCS). Check the TCS as soon
as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-5 for more information. Press and release
the reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it
from the display.
TURN SIGNAL
This message displays when the turn signal is on for
about 0.75 miles (1.2 km) of travel. Press and release
the reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it
from the display.
3-47
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read
the pages following to familiarize yourself with its
features.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2. Here
are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction
while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
•Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
•Familiarize yourself with its operation.
•Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer/retailer. Also, check federal rules covering
mobile radio and telephone units. If sound
equipment can be added, it is very important to do
it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere
with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,
or other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-20 for more
information.
Setting the Time
Press and hold H until the correct hour and AM or PM
displays. Press and hold M until the correct minute
displays. The time can be set with the ignition on or off.
3-48
Radio(s)
Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
Radio with Single CD
Radio with Six-Disc CD Player
3-49
Playing the Radio
P(Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or to
decrease the volume.
DISP (Display): Press to switch the display between
the radio station frequency and the time. When the
ignition is turned off, press to display the time.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP button while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel: Artist,
Song Title, Category or PTY (program type), Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
button until you see the desired display, then hold
this knob for two seconds. The radio produces one beep
and the selected display becomes the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press to select
LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. Each higher setting allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Then as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. NONE displays if the radio cannot
determine the vehicle speed. To turn automatic
volume off, press until AVOL OFF displays.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The selection displays.
e(Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
tSEEK u:Press and release the arrows to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds. SCN or SCAN displays and the
radio produces one beep. The radio goes to a station,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds. PSC or PSCN displays and
the radio produces two beeps. The radio goes to
a preset station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to
the next preset station. Press either arrow again or
one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
3-50
4(Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service): If the
current station has a message, the information symbol
displays. Press to see the message. The message can
display the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message appears every three seconds. To scroll through
the message, press and release this button. A new group
of words display after every press of this button. Once the
complete message has displayed, the information symbol
disappears from the display until another new message is
received. The last message can be displayed by pressing
the 4button. You can view the last message until a new
message is received or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station, NO
INFO displays.
1-6 (Preset Pushbuttons) (Radio with Six-Disc CD
Player): Press to play stations that are programmed on
the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio only seeks preset stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station that
was set, returns and the equalization that was
selected, is stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-51
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
e(Bass/Treble): Press and release until BAS/BASS,
or TRE/TREB displays. Turn to increase or to
decrease. The display shows the bass or the treble
level. If a station is weak or has static, decrease
the treble.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
press and hold this knob. The radio produces one beep.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold when no tone or speaker control
is displayed. CEN or ALL CENTERED displays and a
beep sounds.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press to select
customized equalization settings designed for
country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, press
and release the eknob until MANUAL displays.
For the Radio with Six-Disc CD Player, the equalization
one through seven options are included only if your
vehicle is equipped with the Bose
®
system. Press the
AUTO EQ button to select equalization settings
designed for equalization one through seven.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, push
and release this knob until BASS and TREB displays.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
e(Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release until
BAL displays. Turn to move the sound toward the
right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release until FAD or FADE
displays. Turn to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, press this knob, then press it again and hold it
until one beep sounds.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold when no tone or speaker control
is displayed. CEN or ALL CENTERED displays and a
beep sounds.
3-52
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
(XM™ Satellite Radio Service Only)
To select and find a desired category perform the
following:
1. Press the CAT button to activate program type
select mode. A category displays.
2. Press the CAT button to select a category.
•For the Radio with Six-Disc CD Player, turn the
eknob to select a category.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select and to take you to the
categories first station.
4. To go to another station within that category and
the category is displayed, press the CAT button
once. If the category is not displayed, press the CAT
button twice to display the category and then to
go to another station.
•For the Radio with Six-Disc CD Player, press
either SEEK arrow to go to another station within
that category and the category is displayed.
5. Press CAT to exit program type select mode.
If CAT times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
or NOT FOUND displays and the radio returns to the
last station you were listening to.
BAND (Alternate Frequency) (Radio with Single
CD): Alternate frequency allows the radio to switch
to a stronger station with the same category. To
turn alternate frequency on, press and hold BAND for
two seconds. AF ON displays. The radio can switch
to stations with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF displays. The radio does
not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR displays it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK
®
system has locked up. Take your vehicle
to your dealer/retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
3-53
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ Radio
Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 3-60 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. If you
want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
Z(eject) button or the DISP knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Care of Your CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully.
Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If the
surface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole
and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
3-54
Care of Your CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD
player and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
For vehicles that have a radio with a Six-Disc CD
player, see the following:
LOAD: Press to load CDs into the CD player. This CD
player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and the indicator light, located to the
right of the slot, begins to flash and LOAD # displays.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # displays, load a CD. Insert the
CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player
pulls the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light begins
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing
and turns green, you can load another CD.
The CD player takes up to six CDs.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio begins to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD displays.
3-55
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number displays. To play a
specific CD, first press the CD button, then press the
numbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD.
A small bar appears under the CD number that
is playing and the track number displays.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
Z(Eject): Press to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold for five seconds.
A beep sounds and the indicator light, located to
the right of the slot, begins to flash and EJECT
ALL displays.
2. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
REMOVE CD # displays. The CD ejects and
can be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light begins
flashing again and another CD ejects.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or the
eject button.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD
automatically pulls back into the player. If CD is pushed
back into the player, before the 25 second time period
is complete, the player senses an error and tries to eject
the CD several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The
player’s 25-second eject timer resets at each press of
the eject button, causing the player to not eject the
CD until the 25-second time period has elapsed.
Z(Eject) (Radio with Single CD): Press to eject a
CD. Eject can be activated with either the ignition or
radio off. CDs can be loaded with the ignition and radio
off if this button is pressed first.
1r(Previous) (Radio with Single CD): Press to go
to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. The previous symbol and the track number
displays. If this button is held or pressed more than once,
the player continues moving backward through the CD.
r(Reverse) (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player): Press
to reverse within the track.
2[(Next) (Radio with Single CD): Press to go to the
next track. The next symbol and the track number
displays. If this button is held or pressed more than once,
the player continues moving forward through the CD.
3-56
[(Fast Forward) (Radio with Six-Disc CD
Player): Press to fast forward within the track.
N(Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
•To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release this button. RPT ON displays. Press again
to turn off repeat play. RPT OFFdisplays.
•To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold this button for two seconds. RPT ON
displays. Press again to turn off repeat play.
RPT OFF displays.
4y(Random) (Radio with Single CD): Press to
hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
The random symbol displays. Press again to turn off
random play.
y(Random) (Radio with Six-Disc CD Player): With
random, you can listen to the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order, on one CD or on all
of the CDs. To use random, do one of the following:
•To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release this button.
RANDOM ONE displays. Press again to turn off
random play.
•To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold this button for
more than two seconds. A beep sounds and
RANDOM ALL displays. Press again to turn off
random play.
tSEEK u(Radio with Single CD): Press the left
arrow to go to the start of the current or the previous
track. Press the right arrow to go to the start of the next
track. Pressing either arrow for more than two seconds
searches the previous or next tracks at two tracks
per second. Release either arrow to stop searching and
to play the track.
tSEEK u(Radio with Six-Disc CD Player): Press
the left arrow to go to the start of the current track,
if more than ten seconds have played. Press the right
arrow to go to the next track. If either arrow is held
or pressed more than once, the player continues moving
backward or forward through the CD.
To scan one CD, press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until SCAN displays and a beep
sounds. The radio goes to the next track, plays
for 10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Press
either arrow again, to stop scanning.
3-57
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds until CD SCAN displays and
a beep sounds. Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds
of the first track of each loaded CD. Press either
arrow again, to stop scanning.
DISP (Display): Press to see how long the current
track has been playing. The elapsed time of the track
displays. To change the default on the display, track or
elapsed time, press until you see the desired display,
then hold for two seconds. The radio produces one beep
and the selected display becomes the default.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The inactive CD(s) remains inside the radio for
future listening.
B(CD): Press to play a CD while listening to the
radio. The CD symbol displays when a CD is loaded.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press to
select an equalization setting while playing a CD. The
equalization is set when a CD is played. See “AUTO
EQ” listed previously for more information. If you select
an EQ setting for your CD, it is activated each time
you play a CD.
Using Song List Mode (Radio with
Six-Disc CD Player)
R(Song List): The six-disc CD changer has a
feature called song list. This feature is capable of saving
20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not display. If S-LIST is
present, press the Rbutton to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the right uSEEK arrow
to locate the track to be saved. The track begins
to play.
4. Press and hold the Rbutton to save the track
into memory. When this button is pressed,
one beep sounds. After two seconds of continuously
pressing this button, two beeps sounds to confirm
the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
3-58
S-LIST FULL displays if you try to save more than
20 selections.
To play the song list, press the Rbutton. One beep
sounds and S-LIST displays. The recorded tracks begins
to play in the order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK arrows.
Seeking past the last saved track returns to the first
saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the Rbutton to turn song list on. S-LIST
displays.
3. Press either SEEK arrow to select the desired track
to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the Rbutton for two seconds.
When this button is pressed, one beep sounds.
After two seconds of continuously pressing
this button, two beeps sound to confirm that the
track has been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track is added to the end of the list.
To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the Rbutton to turn song list on. S-LIST
displays.
3. Press and hold the Rbutton for more than
four seconds. One beep sounds, followed by
two beeps after two seconds, and a final beep
sounds after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY displays
indicating the song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the
song list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the Rbutton. One beep
sounds and S-LIST is removed from the display.
3-59
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
•It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
•You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
•The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
•The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
•The format of the CD might not be compatible.
•There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
•The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
XM Radio Messages
xL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is being
updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but the
vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
CH Off Air: This channel is not currently in service.
Tune in to another channel.
CH Unavail: This previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station
was one of the presets, choose another station for
that preset button.
No Info: No artist, song title, category, or text
information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-60
Not Found: There are no channels available for the
selected category. The system is working properly.
XM Locked: The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message will
alternate with the XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there may be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Chk XMRcvr: If this message does not clear within a
short period of time, the receiver may have a fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Navigation/Radio System
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no
matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the Navigation System manual for some
tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK
®
is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it does
not operate and LOCKED displays.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK
®
is armed.
With THEFTLOCK
®
activated, the radio does not
operate if stolen.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static during normal radio
reception can occur if items such as cellphone chargers,
vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power
outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
3-61
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on your radio.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reach
only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or
hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound
to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM™
signal for a period of time. The radio may display NO
SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
3-62
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunk Driving .................................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3
Braking .........................................................4-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-4
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-5
Locking Rear Axle ..........................................4-6
StabiliTrak
®
System ........................................4-7
Steering ........................................................4-8
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-10
Passing .......................................................4-10
Loss of Control .............................................4-10
Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-12
Assist Steps .................................................4-31
Driving at Night ............................................4-32
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-33
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-34
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-34
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-34
Winter Driving ..............................................4-35
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow .....................................4-39
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-40
Recovery Loops ...........................................4-40
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-42
Towing ..........................................................4-48
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-48
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-48
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-50
Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-62
Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle
4-1
Your Driving, the Road,
and Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively
is to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 1-10.
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
•Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
•Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Drunk Driving
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who
has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you are with a group, designate a driver who
will not drink.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision,
and attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have
been associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
4-2
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than
if the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your
vehicle. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-5.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-33.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
4-3
This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to
cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer
brake life.
If your vehicle ever loses electrical power while you
are driving, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If you do, the pedal could get harder to push down.
If your vehicle loses electrical power, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it when
you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it can take
longer to stop, the brake pedal will be harder to push,
and you might experience longer pedal travel.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on.
This is normal.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light will
stay on. See Antilock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-34.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-4
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let antilock work for you. You might feel the
brakes vibrate or notice some noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road
conditions. The system operates only if it senses that any
of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction.
When this happens, the system applies the brakes to limit
wheel spin and also reduces engine power. You may feel
or hear the system working, but this is normal.
The Traction Control System may operate on dry roads
under some conditions. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration or a pumping sound.
This is normal and doesn’t mean there’s a problem with
your vehicle. Examples of these conditions include hard
acceleration in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift of
the transmission or driving on rough roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TCS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may re-engage the cruise control.
See Cruise Control on page 3-11.
If your vehicle has a Driver information Center (DIC),
a TRACTION FAULT message will appear when a
Traction Control System or Anti-Lock Brake System
problem has been detected and the vehicle needs
service. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-43
for more information.
4-5
When this message is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to.
To turn the system off,
press and hold the TCS
button for five seconds.
This light will come
on steady when the
traction control system
has been turned off.
This light flashes when
TCS is active.
If you press and hold the TC button for five seconds,
the traction control system will turn off and a TRAC OFF
message will appear on the DIC. Press the TC button
again to turn the system back on. The TRAC OFF
message will then go off. The traction control system
will reset itself at each ignition cycle.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3 for more information.
Locking Rear Axle
Your vehicle may have this feature. The locking rear axle
can give your vehicle additional traction from the rear
wheels when traveling in off-road situations such as mud,
snow, sand, steep hills and uneven terrain.
The button used to turn
this feature on or off is
located to the right of
the transfer case buttons
on the center of the
instrument panel.
4-6
To lock the rear axle, do the following:
1. Place the transfer case in the 4LO Lock mode. This
is the only mode which will allow the rear axle to
lock. See Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-27
for more information regarding the transfer case
and 4LO Lock mode.
2. Press the button with the vehicle stopped or moving
less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
You must wait for the light in the button to stop flashing
and remain illuminated before the rear axle is locked.
Notice: If you try to lock the rear axle while your
vehicle is stuck and the tires are spinning, you
could damage your vehicle’s drivetrain. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always lock
the rear axle before attempting situations and/or
navigating terrain which could possibly cause the
vehicle to become stuck.
The locking rear axle will be disengaged when the
wheel speed is greater than 20 mph (32 km/h), if the
vehicle’s battery is low and/or the transfer case is
shifted out of 4LO Lock mode.
Notice: If you lock the rear axle while driving on
pavement, you could damage your vehicle’s
drivetrain. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not use the locking rear axle
on pavement. If you need four-wheel drive when
traveling on pavement, use only 4HI.
StabiliTrak
®
System
Your vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement
system called StabiliTrak
®
. It is an advanced computer
controlled system that assists you with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
StabiliTrak
®
activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between your intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak
®
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of
the vehicle’s brakes to assist the driver with keeping
the vehicle on the intended path.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
insure there are no problems. You may hear or feel
the system working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with your vehicle.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak
®
,a
SERVICE STAB SYS message will be displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-43 for more information. When
this message is displayed, the system is not operational.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
4-7
StabiliTrak
®
comes on automatically whenever you
start your vehicle. However, when the transfer case is
placed in Four-Wheel-Low Lock mode, StabiliTrak
®
is automatically disabled. See Full-Time Four-Wheel
Drive on page 2-27 for more information. To help assist
you with directional control of the vehicle, you should
always leave the system on. You can turn StabiliTrak
®
off if you ever need to using the TC (traction control)
on/off button. If you press and hold the TC button for
five seconds, the StabiliTrak
®
system and the traction
control system will turn off. When this is done, the
STAB SYS OFF message will be displayed on the DIC.
Press the TC button again to turn StabiliTrak
®
back
on. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-5.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the StabiliTrak
®
activates, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may reengage the cruise control.
See Cruise Control on page 3-11 for more information.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you
turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will
keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you
have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden
acceleration can demand too much of those places.
You can lose control. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-5 and StabiliTrak
®
System on page 4-7.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
4-8
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the
front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.
Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 5-3.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-3.
It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-9
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
Passing
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing,
we suggest the following tips:
•Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
•Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your
side of the lane.
•Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
•Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
•When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
4-10
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the acceleration skid. If your traction system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-5
and StabiliTrak
®
System on page 4-7.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause
the tires to slide. You may not realize the surface
is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues — such as enough water,
ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-11
Off-Road Driving
This off-road guide is meant to provide advice for
when you drive your vehicle off paved roads. Also,
see Braking on page 4-3.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
The airbag system is designed to work properly
under a wide range of conditions, including off-road
usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especially on
rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are
not marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that
is why it is very important that you read this guide.
You will find many driving tips and suggestions.
These will help make your off-road driving safer
and more enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out.
For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields are properly attached. Make sure
any equipment you may need — first aid kit, cell phone,
flashlight, etc. — is securely stored in the vehicle. Be sure
you read all the information about your four-wheel-drive
vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare
tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they
should be? What are the local laws that apply to
off-roading where you will be driving? If you do not
know, you should check with law enforcement people
in the area. Will you be on someone’s private land?
If so, be sure to get the necessary permission.
4-12
Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving
{CAUTION:
•Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
the seatbacks can be thrown forward during
a sudden stop. You or your passengers
could be injured. Keep cargo below the
top of the seatbacks.
•Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
•Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof.
Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward
and low as possible.
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
•The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items in the
rear area, as far forward as you can.
•Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42 and Tires
on page 5-54.
4-13
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the
environment:
•Always use established trails, roads, and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
•Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment — shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses — or
disturb wildlife. This includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees, or unnecessary driving
through streams or over soft ground.
•Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
•Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves, and lanterns.
•Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to
read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to
know how to use it properly.
High Mobility Characteristics
Your vehicle has a 10 inch (25.4 cm) running ground
clearance (A), a 9 inch (22.8 cm) axle to ground
clearance (B), and a low center of gravity.
4-14
Your vehicle has an approximate approach angle (A)
of 37.5 degrees and a departure angle (B) of
35.5 degrees, depending on suspension packages.
4-15
Design specifications required a minimum gradeability
of 60% (31 degrees) slope, with the vehicle fully loaded,
on high friction surfaces with maximum vehicle speed
not to exceed 6 mph (9.7 km/h). The vehicle is expected
to traverse this grade only for short durations. Never stop
and idle the vehicle or park it on this grade.
Also, your vehicle should be able to traverse a 40%
(22 degrees) side slope at 6 mph (9.7 km/h) while
fully loaded on high friction surfaces.
4-16
Your vehicle can climb a 16 inch (40.6 cm) vertical step.
Step climbing is best done by approaching the step at
an angle rather than straight on.
Brake and Accelerator Operation
Techniques for Off-Road Driving
For logs, walls, rocks, severe ditches,
hills, sand, etc.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Do not rev
the engine.
2. Select the proper transmission and transfer
case gear range; usually FIRST (1) gear,
Four-Wheel-Low Lock for such obstacles.
3. If wheel spin is experienced, maintain steady
throttle, with your foot off the brake pedal, to
allow the Traction Control System (TCS) to
control the wheel spin. TCS might not operate
if the brakes are applied.
4. If wheel spin cannot be controlled by the TCS
system, fully press the brake pedal with your
left foot so all wheel spin is stopped.
5. Back away from the obstacle so that a new
approach can be tried.
6. As the first wheel crosses the obstacle, be
prepared to alternate the brake and accelerator
pedal to maintain control and avoid tire drop-off
from obstacles. Repeat this process for the
other wheels.
4-17
For mounds, washouts, loose up-hill
slopes, ditches, etc.
When wheel spin occurs as the vehicle is moving, the
driver may notice a slight shaking or shuddering of
the vehicle. This should be stopped as soon as possible
to prevent damage to vehicle components. This is the
indication that a loss of traction is occurring on this
terrain. The operator should:
1. Reduce speed and apply the brakes.
2. Assess the terrain properly and adjust
vehicle speed and gear ranges accordingly:
Four-Wheel High position for higher speeds and
Four-Wheel-Low Lock for more torque and
lower speeds. Transmission FIRST (1) gear is
generally recommended.
3. Apply slight pressure to the brake when the
shaking or shuddering sensation is felt, keeping
the vehicle moving in a controlled manner.
4. Be prepared to alternate between braking and
accelerating through the adverse terrain.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet, and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
•You approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
•You have less time to react.
•You have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.
•You will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
4-18
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you
to lose control and crash. So, whether you
are driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration, and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer
braking distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles
can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can
startle you if you are not prepared for them. Often
these obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow,
or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself.
Here are some things to consider:
•Is the path ahead clear?
•Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
•Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects later.
•Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep
a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands
if you are not prepared.
When possible, it is a good practice to survey the
landscape ahead on foot prior to driving to observe
hidden obstacles.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
the wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
4-19
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits, or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and
driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You could have a serious — or even fatal — accident
if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has
been drinking. See Drunk Driving on page 4-2.
Crossing Obstacles
Approach Angle — a Key to Mobility
If you encounter a large dip in the terrain, do not enter
straight on; enter at an angle — 15 degrees minimum
approach (A), 75 degrees maximum approach angle (B).
For very large dips, ditches, or small washes, coast
in, using the engine as a brake (transmission and
transfer case lowest gears). Then, use the low ranges
in the transmission and transfer case to power out.
4-20
Roll Your Tires Over Large Rocks
Do not straddle large
rocks; drive over them,
letting the tire cover
the rock. The tread of
the tire is thicker and
tougher than the
sidewall of the tire and
is more resilient to
impact than underbody
components.
Log Crossing
Using the proper technique, your vehicle will cross
logs up to 10 inches (25.4 cm) in diameter. Approach
the log at approximately a 15 degree angle (A) with
the transmission in FIRST (1) and the transfer case in
Four-Wheel-Low Lock and “walk” your vehicle over,
one tire at a time. It may be necessary to modulate
your brake pedal and accelerator to avoid spin-out.
Ease the vehicle down from the log with your brake.
4-21
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot
be driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed.
If you drive across them, you will roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed.
If you have any doubt about the steepness,
do not drive the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it
is one of those hills that is just too steep to climb,
descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.
On a very small hill, for example, there may be a
smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to
the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as
you near the top, but you may not see this because the
crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you
approach a hill:
•Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
•Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
•Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
•Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
•What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart
way to find out.
•Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-22
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill,
you need to take some special steps:
•Use transmission and transfer case low gear
and get a firm grip on the steering wheel.
•Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want the wheels to
start spinning or sliding.
•Let the traction system work to control any wheel
slippage. The traction control system allows for
moderate wheel spin with some capability to dig
in and power up the hill.
•Do not continue if the vehicle shudders or exhibits
suspension hopping. This can cause damage to
the driveline or suspension components. Improper
driving technique is not covered by your vehicle
warranty.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could
be seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
•Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
•Ease up on your speed as you approach the top
of the hill.
•Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
4-23
•Sound the horn as you approach the top of the
hill to let opposing traffic know you are there.
•Use your headlamps even during the day.
They make your vehicle more visible to
oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
There are some things you should do if the vehicle stalls,
or is about to stall, and you cannot make it up the hill:
•Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking
brake.
•If your engine is still running, shift the transmission to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
•If your engine has stopped running, you will need
to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed, apply
the parking brake. If you have an automatic
transmission, shift the transmission to PARK (P).
Restart the engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R),
release the parking brake, and slowly back down
the hill as straight as possible in REVERSE (R).
•As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is best
that you back down the hill with your wheels straight
rather than in the left or right direction. Turning the
wheel too far to the left or right will increase the
possibility of a rollover.
4-24
There are also some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill:
•Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back straight down.
•Never attempt to turn around if you are about to
stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake. If you
have an automatic transmission, shift to PARK (P).
Turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get
some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of
the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill.
Do not shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL when you
leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL
can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P), or, if you have a
manual transmission, even if you are in gear.
This is because the NEUTRAL position on the
transfer case overrides the transmission. You
or someone else could be injured. If you are
going to leave your vehicle, set the parking
brake and shift the transmission to PARK (P),
or, put the manual transmission in FIRST (1).
But do not shift the transfer case to
NEUTRAL. Leave the transfer case in the
Four-Wheel High, Four-Wheel-High Lock,
or Four-Wheel-Low Lock position.
4-25
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
•How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
•What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
•Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
•What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade.
This could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to
keep vehicle speed under control.
4-26
There some things not to do when driving down a hill.
These are important because, if you ignore them,
you could lose control and have a serious accident:
•When driving downhill, avoid turns that take
you across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not
too steep to drive down may be too steep to
drive across. You could roll over if you do not
drive straight down.
•Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and
could overheat and fade.
Your vehicle is much more likely to stall when going
uphill. But if it happens when going downhill:
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
2. If you have an automatic transmission, shift to
PARK (P). While still braking, restart the engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go
across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have
to decide whether to try to drive across the incline.
Here are some things to consider:
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
•A hill that can be driven straight up or down may
be too steep to drive across. When you go straight
up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the
distance from the front wheels to the rear
wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will
tumble end over end. But when you drive across an
incline, the much more narrow track width — the
distance between the left and right wheels — may
not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Also, driving across an incline puts more weight on
the downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
4-27
•Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive
across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something that
will trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
•Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline does not mean you
have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might
have rolled over.
When driving across an incline that is not too steep,
the vehicle can hit some loose gravel and start to slide
downhill. If you feel your vehicle starting to slide
sideways, turn downhill. This should help straighten
out the vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and “walk
the course” so you know what the surface is like before
you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous.
If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or
killed. Always get out on the uphill (high) side
of the vehicle and stay well clear of the
rollover path.
4-28
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the
uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open.
If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle
starts to roll over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, your wheels
will not get good traction. You cannot accelerate
as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will
need longer braking distances.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck. Be careful to keep mud from building
up and washing onto the engine cooling system.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such
as on beaches or sand dunes, your tires will tend
to sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating, and braking. Drive at a reduced speed
and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
4-29
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that
you will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
{CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the
vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing
water.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles,
or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will not get
through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle and
other vehicle parts. Your vehicle is capable of depths up
to 20 inches (50 cm). Know how to judge whether the
water is deeper than this before proceeding into it.
4-30
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if
you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as
your tailpipe is under water, you will never be able
to start your engine. When you go through water,
remember that when your brakes get wet, it may
take you longer to stop.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-33 for
more information on driving through water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
the underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the engine and
oil coolers and underbody skid shields for mud
accumulation. Thoroughly and carefully clean these
devices to allow proper cooling. Check the body
structure, steering, suspension, underbody shields,
wheels, tires, and exhaust system for damage. Also,
check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due
to off-road use. See the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Assist Steps
If your vehicle has removable side steps, remove the
steps prior to off-roading to give your vehicle more ground
clearance and to prevent damage to the vehicle from the
side steps dragging and/or catching on obstacles.
Notice: Do not drive off-road with the side steps
attached to your vehicle. You can damage the
side steps and/or your vehicle’s frame if they get
caught or drag against an obstacle. This damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
Always remove the side steps prior to any off-road
driving.
4-31
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Night driving tips include:
•Drive defensively.
•Do not drink and drive.
•Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
•Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because your headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
•Watch for animals.
•When tired, pull off the road.
•Do not wear sunglasses.
•Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
•Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
•Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
4-32
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water. This
can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going
fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has
little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
•Allow extra following distance.
•Pass with caution.
•Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
•Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
•Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-54.
4-33
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
Things to check on your own include:
•Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
•Wiper Blades: In good shape?
•Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
•Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
•Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
•Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have up-to-date
maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
Other driving tips include:
•Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
•Keep interior temperature cool.
•Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
•Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
•Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
•Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
•Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
4-34
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
•Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
•Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
•Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-12 for information
about driving off-road.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
•Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
•You might want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,
a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles.
And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet,
or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction.
Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-54.
4-35
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to be very
careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can
be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
The Traction Control System (TCS) improves your ability
to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. TCS
improves your ability to accelerate. See If Your Vehicle
is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-39. Even
though you have TCS, slow down and adjust your driving
to the road conditions. Under certain conditions, you
might want to turn the TCS off, such as when driving
through deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain
vehicle motion at lower speeds. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-5 and StabiliTrak
®
System on
page 4-7.
4-36
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-4.
•Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
•Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you
are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things
to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
•Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
•Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you
have been stopped by the snow.
•Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around yourself
or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-37
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking the exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
4-38
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-40.
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too
severe for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn
the traction system off and use the rocking method.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-77.
4-39
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. The traction control
system activates when the system senses that the
wheels are spinning. Turn off any traction or stability
system. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-5
and StabiliTrak
®
System on page 4-7. Then, with the
wheels straight ahead, shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, or with a manual
transmission, between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2)
and REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until
the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly
on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion
that could free your vehicle. If that does not get your
vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed
out. Or, you can use the recovery loops. If your
vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-48.
Recovery Loops
{CAUTION:
These loops, when used, are under a lot of
force. Keep people away from the vicinity of
the loops and any chains or cables during use.
Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull
on the loops at a sideways angle. The loops
could break off and you or others could be
injured from the chain or cable snapping back.
Notice: Never use the recovery loops to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
4-40
Your vehicle has two
recovery loops at the front
of the vehicle and one
at the rear of the vehicle.
You may need to use them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
Rear of Vehicle
Front of Vehicle
4-41
If your vehicle has a brush guard, never tow or apply
any loads onto the brush guard.
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
4-42
Tire and Loading Information Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will
find the label attached below the door latch post.
The Tire and Loading Information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also
shows the size of your vehicle’s original equipment
tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more information on tires and
inflation see Tires on page 5-54 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-62.
There is also important information on the
Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this
section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Label Example
4-43
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 −750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for
important information on towing a trailer,
towing safety, and trailering tips.
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
BSubtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) x 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
CAvailable Cargo
Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 1
4-44
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
BSubtract
Occupant Weight
150lbs(68kg)x5= 750 lbs (340 kg)
CAvailable Cargo
Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)
Item Description Total
AVehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
BSubtract
Occupant Weight
200lbs(91kg)x5=
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
CAvailable Cargo
Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg)
Example 2 Example 3
4-45
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, cargo
and any accessories or equipment added to your
vehicle after it left the factory should never exceed
your vehicle’s capacity weight.
Certification/Tire Label
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is
attached to the bottom section of the center
pillar (B-pillar), on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
The label shows the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo and trailer
tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station
and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your
load equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or
the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
If you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different
GVWRs and capacity weights. Please note your
vehicle’s Certification/Tire label or consult
your dealer for additional details.
Label Example
4-46
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load
your vehicle the right way.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle – like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else – they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have
to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they
will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
•Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
•Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
•Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
•When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
•Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road
Driving on page 4-12.
4-47
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground
and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
•What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
•How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
•Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
•Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-34.
4-48
Dinghy Towing
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition in ON.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Shifting a full-time four-wheel-drive vehicle’s
transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the automatic
transmission is in PARK (P) or the manual
transmission is in any gear. You or others
could be injured. Make sure the parking brake
is firmly set before you shift the transfer case
to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-27 for
the proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL
position for your vehicle.
6. Put the transmission in PARK (P) for an
automatic transmission or in FIRST (1) for
a manual transmission.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition off.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL” under
Full-Time Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-27.
Dolly Towing
Notice: Dolly towing your vehicle will damage
drivetrain components. Do not dolly tow your
vehicle.
Your vehicle cannot be dolly towed. If you must tow
your vehicle behind another, use the dinghy towing
procedure listed previously.
4-49
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with your
vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
4-50
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
•There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make
sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
•Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later in
this section.
•Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
•Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow
a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t
make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine
and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
•If you have an automatic transmission, you can tow
in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the transmission
to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear if the
transmission shifts too often under heavy loads
and/or hilly conditions. If you have a manual
transmission and you are towing a trailer, it is
better not to use the highest gear.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
•The weight of the trailer
•The weight of the trailer tongue
•And the weight on your vehicle’s tires
4-51
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment that
you have on your vehicle, and the amount of tongue
weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Use the following chart to determine how much
your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle
model and options.
Engine Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR
Automatic Transmission, 3.7L Engine 4.56 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
Automatic Transmission, 5.3L Engine 4.10 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg) 11,400 lbs (5 171 kg)
Manual Transmission 4.56 3,000 lbs (1 364 kg) 8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) in the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-5 for more information.
4-52
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce
the tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
If you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to
a maximum of 500 lbs (227 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch or a weight distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
Your spare tire carrier is behind the tailgate. If your
hitch extension is too short, the spare tire may interfere
with trailer coupling or trailer tongue jack operation
on some types of trailers.
4-53
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get
them right simply by moving some items around
in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification/Tire Label located on the B-pillar below the
door latch or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your
vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer
tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch, make sure
you don’t go over the rear axle limit before you apply the
weight distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must be
adjusted so that the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle’s ability
to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce
your trailering capacity more than the total of the
additional weight.
(A) Body-to-Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle
4-54
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and
a GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of
trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight
is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear
axle will be greater than just the weight itself, as much as
1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could be
850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the
rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding
1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg).
This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR as
well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs
(3 856 kg).
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think you
must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
to avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you must still consider
the effect on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now
weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding RGAWR.
4-55
The effect of tongue weight is about 1.5 times the actual
weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you
with being able to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue
weight. Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The
only way to be sure you are not exceeding any
of these ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you
are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly
as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
4-56
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. Because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-57
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer work well.
If you have an automatic transmission, you can tow
in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if
the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads
and/or hilly conditions.
If you have a manual transmission and you are towing a
trailer, it is better not to use the highest gear.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs similar
to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level ground, with the
automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a few minutes
before turning the engine off. For manual transmissions,
let the engine run while parked, preferably on level
ground, with the transmission out of gear and the parking
brake applied, for a few minutes before turning the engine
off. If you do get the overheat warning, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-29.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet for an automatic transmission, or into
gear for a manual transmission. Turn your wheels
into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing
uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P) for an
automatic transmission or into gear for a manual
transmission.
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-58
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
•start your engine,
•shift into a gear, and
•release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine
oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake
system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and
the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re
trailering, it’s a good idea to review these sections
before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Light-Duty Trailer Wiring Package
If your vehicle is not equipped with a trailer towing
package, the chassis harness will contain the following
blunt cut circuits:
•Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
•Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
•White: Ground
•Brown: Tail Lamps
If you want to add on a trailer tow, it should be installed
by your dealer/retailer or a qualified service center.
Also, see Add-On Electrical Equipment on page 5-101
for more information.
4-59
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package
If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer towing package,
the rear bumper harness will have a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector attached to a bracket on the
hitch platform.
The trailer towing harness contains the following seven
trailer circuits:
•Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
•Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
•Brown: Taillamps
•White: Ground
•Light Green: Back-up Lamps
•Red: Battery Feed
•Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, turn
on the headlamps to boost the vehicle system voltage
to properly charge the battery.
4-60
Four-Wire Harness Adapter
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way, flat pin connector, an adapter is available from
your dealer/retailer.
Use this adapter to
connect a standard
four-way pin connector to
the seven-wire harness
on your vehicle.
Connect the adapter with the tab pointing up. The flip
cap on the vehicle’s seven-wire harness will lock
onto the tab (see arrow in the previous graphic) and
help hold the adapter in place. Plug the four-way
pin connector onto the adapter.
4-61
Trailer Brake Control Wiring Harness
The trailer brake control wiring harness is located
under the instrument panel to the right of the steering
column. The wires are taped to the harness that goes
to the courtesy light under the instrument panel.
The harness will contain the following wires:
•Red Wire: AUX B+
•Black Wire: Ground
•Light Blue Wire: Brake Signal
•Dark Blue Wire: Trailer Brakes
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
Weight Rating (CWR). CWR is the maximum weight
of the load your vehicle can carry. It doesn’t include the
weight of the people inside, but you can figure about
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each seat. The total cargo load
must not be more than your vehicles CWR.
Weigh your vehicle with your trailer attached, so that
you won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using
a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without
the spring bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information see Towing a Trailer on page 4-50.
4-62
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-11
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-15
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-21
Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-24
Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-26
Engine Coolant .............................................5-27
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-29
Engine Overheating .......................................5-29
Cooling System ............................................5-31
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-36
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-36
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-37
Brakes ........................................................5-38
Battery ........................................................5-41
Jump Starting ...............................................5-42
Rear Axle .......................................................5-45
Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-46
Front Axle ......................................................5-46
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-46
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-49
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-49
Headlamps ..................................................5-49
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-50
License Plate Lamp ......................................5-51
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-52
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-52
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
5-1
Tires ..............................................................5-54
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-59
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-62
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-63
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .....................5-65
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-68
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-70
Buying New Tires .........................................5-71
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-73
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-74
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-75
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-75
Tire Chains ..................................................5-77
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-78
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-79
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-81
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-83
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-89
Spare Tire ...................................................5-91
Appearance Care ............................................5-91
Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-91
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-93
Leather .......................................................5-93
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ..................................................5-94
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-94
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-94
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-95
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-95
Finish Care ..................................................5-96
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .........5-97
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim ...5-97
Tires ...........................................................5-98
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-98
Finish Damage .............................................5-98
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-98
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-99
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-99
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-100
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-100
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-101
Electrical System ..........................................5-101
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-101
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-101
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-102
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-102
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................5-103
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-107
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-107
Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Service
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Accessories and Modifications
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-68.
5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may
be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
•Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
•Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
5-4
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-67.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This can cause
wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield
washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer
before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See
Additives on page 5-6 for additional information.
5-5
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance might be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-36. If this occurs, return to your authorized
dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that
the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
might not be covered by your warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
5-6
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The fuel cap is located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
5-8
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether, if
it has one.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel
cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly
burned. This spray can happen if your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss
noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the
way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-95.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-36.
The FUEL CAP message will be displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not properly
installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-43 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-36.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the fuel vapor. You
can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
•Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
•Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
•Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
•Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
•Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-10
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle on the lower
left side of the
instrument panel.
2. Release the secondary latch on the hood. It is
located below the front center of the hood.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 3.7L engine, this is what you will see:
5-12
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-37.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27.
C. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-36.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-21.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on
page 5-31.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND). See Jump
Starting on page 5-42.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
J. Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-38.
L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-103.
M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.
N. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped).
See Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-26.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine, this is what you will see:
5-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped).
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-37.
D. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick (If Equipped).
See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-21.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
H. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-38.
I. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-36.
K. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on
page 5-31.
L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-103.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-15
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area (L), add at
least one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil
crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-107.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-16
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
•GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an oil
that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
•SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
•Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
5-17
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
cold starting and better protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you need for good performance and
engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL message will come on.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-43.
Change the oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
might not indicate that an oil change is necessary
for over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained
people who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. It is also important to check
the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change
the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
5-18
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change the oil prior to a CHANGE OIL
message being turned on, reset the system.
To reset the Engine Oil Life system:
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
2. Press and release the stem in the lower center
of the instrument cluster until the OIL LIFE
message is displayed.
3. Once the alternating OIL LIFE and RESET
messages appear, press and hold the stem
until several beeps sound. This confirms that the oil
life system has been reset.
4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL message comes back on when you
start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the procedure. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-43.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local recycling
center for help.
5-19
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If you
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Unfasten the clips that hold the cover on and
remove the cover.
2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/filter.
3. Inspect or replace the air filter. See Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-14 to
determine which filter to use.
4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover. Fasten
the clips to hold the cover in place.
5-20
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service
department.
5-21
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
•At high speed for quite a while.
•In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
•While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive
the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature
gage moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
5-22
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
The automatic
transmission dipstick
handle with this symbol on
it is located in the engine
compartment on the
passenger’s side of the
vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get an
accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-23
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If
the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid
to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
•After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
•When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is
changed. However, the fluid in your manual transmission
does not require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your GM dealer/retailer
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too little fluid could cause the
transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate
reading if you check your transmission fluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission
is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
5-24
Then, follow these steps:
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
How to Add Fluid
Here is how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully
seated.
5-25
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is
filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
The hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this
symbol on it. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding
fluid will not correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
When to Check and What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your clutch
master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-26
How to Check and Add Fluid
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not
reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it is in place in
the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL
®
engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL
®
extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-29.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL
®
coolant will:
•Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
•Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
•Protect against rust and corrosion.
•Help keep the proper engine temperature.
•Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL
®
may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL
®
(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-27
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL
®
coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty.
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core, and other parts.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Checking Coolant
The coolant recovery tank
cap has this symbol on it.
It is located toward the rear of the engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD, or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the
level could be above the FULL COLD level.
5-28
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost
never have to add coolant at the radiator. Never
turn the radiator pressure cap — even a little —
when the engine and radiator are hot.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-31.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
Engine Overheating
A coolant temperature gage is on the instrument panel.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-35.
The air conditioning might stop working if the engine
is too hot. This is normal and helps cool the engine.
5-29
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•Climb a long hill on a hot day.
•Stop after high-speed driving.
•Idle for long periods in traffic.
•Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-50.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn off the air conditioning.
3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
5-30
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you are parked. Push down
the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as
fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes
while you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn
off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle
until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Engine Cooling Fan
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The
vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
3.7L Engine shown, 5.3L Engine similar
5-31
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it is not, you
may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off
the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL
®
may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL
®
(silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
5-32
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL
®
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-27 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The
engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL
®
coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
5-33
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. Add the proper mixture directly to the
radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before
you do it.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. Remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one full turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the cap to remove it.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
5-34
4. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL
COLD mark.
5. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressure cap off.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck might be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap.
At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to
flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap.
Be sure to secure it tightly.
5-35
Engine Fan Noise
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel
economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures,
the fan speed increases when the clutch engages.
So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This
is normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely
the cooling system functioning properly. The fan will
slow down when additional cooling is not required and
the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
5-36
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid
level on the dipstick.
The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the proper range.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage your
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Notice:
•When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
•Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
•Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
•Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-37
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid
is leaking out of the brake hydraulic system.
If it is, you should have the brake hydraulic system
fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the
brakes will not work well.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove
brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-38
Checking Brake Fluid
The brake fluid can be checked without taking off the
cap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
The fluid level should be above MIN. If it is not, have
the brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is
a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
Notice:
•Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
•If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-95.
5-39
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-107.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, the disc brakes
adjust for wear.
5-40
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This will help keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery
or use a battery trickle charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an extended period
of time.
5-41
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
•They contain acid that can burn you.
•They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
•They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
5-42
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries on both
vehicles. You will use the positive (+) battery terminal
and the remote negative (−) jump starting terminal to
jump start your vehicle. To access the positive (+)
battery terminal, open the terminal cover. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on the terminal locations.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the batteries have enough water. You
do not need to add water to the ACDelco
®
battery (or batteries) installed in your new
vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure
the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do
not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)oryou
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-43
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal,
marked GND (Ground), for this purpose.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
Jumper Cable Removal
5-44
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) battery terminal cover to its
original position.
Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 mm to 10 mm)
below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on
the rear axle.
What to Use
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12
to determine which kind of lubricant to use.
5-45
Four-Wheel Drive
It is recommended that the four-wheel drive transfer
case fluid be checked and filled by your dealer.
Front Axle
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
It is recommended that the front axle fluid be checked
and filled by your dealer.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle may have a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may be
necessary.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
The vehicle should:
•Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall or other flat surface.
•Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to a wall.
•Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other
flat surface.
•Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
•Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
•Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
•Have the tires properly inflated.
•Have the spare tire is in its original location in the
vehicle.
5-46
To adjust the vertical aim:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
2. Find the aim dot on the lens of the headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on the headlamp.
4. At a wall, measure from the ground upward the
recorded distance from Step 2 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line the width of the
vehicle at the wall where it was marked it Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
6. Turn on the headlamps and place a piece of
cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not
being aimed. This should allow only the beam of
light from the headlamp being aimed to be seen on
the wall.
5-47
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with an E8
Torx
®
socket or T15 Torx
®
screwdriver.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower
the beam.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
9. Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for the opposite headlamp.
Passenger’s Side Shown
5-48
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-52.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
To replace a headlamp bulb:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
2. Reach in and access the headlamp bulb socket
from inside the engine compartment.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly and pull it straight out.
4. Unplug the electrical connector by pushing
the release tab and pulling the bulb socket out.
5. Replace with a new bulb socket.
6. Reinstall the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the new bulb socket into the headlamp
assembly and turn it clockwise to secure.
8. Close the hood.
5-49
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
A. Stoplamp, Taillamp and
Turn Signal Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs in the taillamp assembly:
1. Open the swing-gate. See Swing-gate on
page 2-10 for more information.
2. Remove the
two screws from the
taillamp assembly.
3. Pull the taillamp assembly away from the vehicle.
Passenger’s Side
Shown
5-50
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
5. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb to release it
from the socket.
6. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to secure.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by lining up
the locator pins with the retainers in the
vehicle’s body.
9. Reinstall the two screws and tighten.
10. Close the swing-gate.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Reach under the bumper for the bulb socket.
2. Remove the two screws holding the license
plate lamp.
5-51
3. Pull the license plate lamp away from the fascia.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the license plate lamp assembly.
5. Install the new bulb into the socket.
6. Insert the bulb socket into the license plate lamp
assembly and turn it clockwise to secure.
7. Replace the license plate lamp assembly and
tighten the two screws.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp Bulb Number
Back-up Lamp, Stoplamp,
Taillamp and Turn Signal Lamp 3157K
License Plate Lamp 194
Low-Beam and High-Beam
Headlamp H13
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-14.
5-52
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the
following:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the hook
and push the wiper arm (A) out of the blade (C).
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the
wiper arm until you hear the release lever click
into place.
To replace the rear wiper blade, lift the rear wiper arm
from the window and pull the blade.
5-53
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
•Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much friction. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
•Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62.
•Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
•Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
5-54
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples
of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size:The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification):Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN):The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
5-55
(E) Tire Ply Material:The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
information, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on
page 5-74.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62
and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
(A) Tire Size:The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
5-56
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification):Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load:Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-62 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation):The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN):The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material:The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load:Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a
single. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-62 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
5-57
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letters LT as the first two characters in the tire
size means a light truck tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(B) Tire Width:The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio:A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
5-58
(D) Construction Code:A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter:Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description:The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure:The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight:This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio:The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt:A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
Bead:The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire:A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure:The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-62.
Curb Weight:The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings:A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
5-59
GVWR:Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
GAWR FRT:Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-42.
GAWR RR:Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of
an asymmetrical tire, that must always face
outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa):The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index:An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight:The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-42.
Occupant Distribution:Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall:The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-62 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
5-60
Radial Ply Tire:A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim:A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall:The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating:An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction:The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread:The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators:Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 5-70.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards):A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-74.
Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard:A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-42.
5-61
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
•Too much flexing
•Too much heat
•Tire overloading
•Premature or irregular wear
•Poor handling
•Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
•Unusual wear
•Poor handling
•Rough ride
•Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Also
check the tire pressure of the spare tire. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, it should
be at 60 psi (420 kPa). See Spare Tire on
page 5-91 for additional information.
5-62
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
5-63
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-65,
for additional information.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry and
Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210 of
Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-64
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly on your vehicle, excluding the
spare tire. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure
in your vehicle’s tires and transmit the tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light located on the
instrument panel cluster.
At the same time, a Driver Information Center (DIC)
message is displayed on the DIC display screen. The
low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning
message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires
are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
For additional information and details about the DIC
operation and displays see DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-40 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-43.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-42, for an example of the Tire
and Loading Information label and its location on
your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-62.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 and Tires on page 5-54.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
5-65
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC
message to come on are:
•One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
•The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
•One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
•Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 5-71.
•Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
5-66
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in
the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side
rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall. To let air-pressure out of a tire you
can use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
You have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall, to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than one minute,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions,
the matching process stops and you need to start over.
The TPMS sensor matching procedure is outlined
below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Turn the exterior lamp switch from AUTO to OFF
four times within three seconds. A double horn
chirp will sound and the TPMS low tire warning light
starts flashing. The double horn chirp and flashing
TPMS warning light indicates the TPMS matching
process has started. The TPMS warning light
should continue flashing throughout the matching
procedure. The LOW TIRE message displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds,
then stop and listen for a single horn chirp.
The single horn chirp should sound within
15 seconds, confirming that the sensor identification
code has been matched to this tire and wheel
position. If you do not hear the confirming single
horn chirp, turn the ignition switch to LOCK and start
over beginning with Step 2.
5-67
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the driver
side rear tire, check to see if the TPMS low tire
warning light and the DIC LOW TIRE messages
have turned off. If yes, the TPMS sensors have
been relearned. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF.
If the low tire warning light and the SERV TPM
message on the DIC are on after completing Step 5
for the driver side rear tire, the sensor relearn
process has not been successful. Turn the ignition
switch to LOCK/OFF and repeat the matching
process beginning with Step 2.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 5-70 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-70
and Wheel Replacement on page 5-75.
5-68
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-62 and Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-42.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 5-65.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-107.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-79.
5-69
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial
truck tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
•You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
•You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
•The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
•The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
•The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-70
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to
meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC spec) system rating. If you need
replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that
you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating.
This way, your vehicle will continue to have tires
that are designed to give the same performance
and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the
original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an all-season tread design, the
TPC spec number will be followed by a MS,
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 5-55 for additional information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four.
This is because uniform tread depth on all
tires will help keep your vehicle performing
most like it did when the tires were new.
5-71
Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect
the braking and handling performance of your
vehicle. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68 for information on proper tire
rotation.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires
may give a low-pressure warning that is higher or
lower than the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 5-63.
5-72
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42, for more
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use
GM specific wheel and tire systems developed
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-71 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-73
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning:The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
5-74
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning:The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-75
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-79 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
5-76
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has LT285/75R16 or P265/65R18
size tires, do not use tire chains. They can
damage your vehicle because there is not
enough clearance. Tire chains used on a
vehicle without the proper amount of clearance
can cause damage to the brakes, suspension,
or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by
the tire chains could cause you to lose control
of your vehicle and you or others may be
injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
LT285/75R16 or P265/65R18 use tire chains only
where legal and only when you must. Use chains that
are the proper size for your tires. Install them on the
tires of the rear axle. Do not use chains on the tires of
the front axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible
with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and
follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you
can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and
retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down
until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels
with chains on will damage your vehicle.
5-77
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-78
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear – not in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
When you have a flat tire, you will first need to set up
the wheel blocks before changing it. They are located in
the tool bag, in the swing-gate. See Removing the
Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-81 for more information.
5-79
To use the wheel blocks,
lift the wheel block and
lock into place.
Then, use the following as a guide to assist you in the
placement of the wheel blocks.
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
5-80
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the
swing-gate, behind a cover. To remove the equipment:
1. Open the swing-gate. See Swing-gate on
page 2-10 for more information.
2. Remove the cover, located on the inside of the
swing-gate, by lifting the two latches.
3. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise to release the
jack tool bag and jack.
4. Remove the tool bag and jack from its compartment.
5. Undo the straps that secure the jack tool bag to
the jack.
6. Open the tool bag and you will find the following
tools, which you will use to remove the spare tire
and flat tire:
A. Wheel Wrench
B. Jack Handle
Extensions
C. Jack Handle
D. Jack
E. Wheel Blocks
5-81
The spare tire is attached to the outside of the
swing-gate. To remove the spare tire:
1. If your vehicle has a spare tire cover release the
latch by pulling the latch straight back and turning
it away from the cover at the same time.
Notice: Opening the endgate before completely
closing and latching the spare tire cover may result
in damage to your vehicle. Close and latch the
spare tire cover before opening the endgate to avoid
possible damage.
2. Remove the center
cap, if equipped, by
placing the flat end of
the wheel wrench
in the slot on the wheel
and gently pry the
center cap out.
5-82
3. Use the wheel wrench
to remove the wheel
nuts securing the
spare tire.
If your vehicle has locking lug nuts, the key is
supplied in the tool bag. Use the key along with the
wheel wrench to remove the wheel nuts from
the tire.
4. Pull off and gently lower the spare tire to the
ground. Set it next to the flat tire.
In order to remove the spare tire, you may need
someone to assist you.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 5-79 for more information.
2. Remove the center cap
by placing the flat end
of the wheel wrench
in the slot on the wheel
and gently pry the
center cap out.
5-83
3. Turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to
loosen the wheel nuts.
Do not remove
them yet.
If your vehicle has locking lug nuts, the key is
supplied in the tool bag. Use the key along with
the wheel wrench to remove the wheel nuts
from the tire.
Now jack up the vehicle.
A. Front Position - Lower Control Arm
B. Rear Position - Lower Axle
4. Locate the vehicle’s jacking positions (A and B).
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
5-84
5. Assemble the jack and tools as follows:
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of
the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle and
both jack handle extensions. Attach the wheel
wrench to the jack handle extensions. Attach the
jack handle to the jack. From the front of the vehicle
position the jack on the front lower control arm
along the bar that runs front to back. Turn the wheel
wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough
room for the spare tire to clear the ground.
Refer to the graphic above to locate the placement
of the jack if the flat tire is on the rear of the
vehicle.
Front Position
Rear Positions
5-85
Rear Tire Flat: You will need to use the jack
handle and both jack handle extensions. Attach the
wheel wrench to the jack extensions. Attach the
jack handle to the jack. From the rear of the vehicle
align the jack under the rear axle. Turn the wheel
wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise
the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is
enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground.
6. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack
head to the lifting point.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-86
7. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become
loose after time. The wheel could come off and
cause an accident. When you change a wheel,
remove any rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,
you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-79.
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
9. Put the spare tire on the mounting surface.
10. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the spare.
5-87
11. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel
is held against the hub.
12. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you
have to replace them, be sure to get new
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-107 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-107 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
13. Tighten the nuts firmly
in a crisscross
sequence as shown by
turning the wheel
wrench clockwise.
14. After installing the wheel and tire, you must reinstall
the center cap. Place the cap on the wheel and tap
it into place until it sits flush with the wheel.
5-88
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
To store the flat or spare tire on the spare tire mount:
1. Slide the flat or spare tire onto the swing-gate.
In order to store the flat or the spare tire, you
may need someone to assist you.
2. Reinstall the nuts to retain the flat or spare tire.
3. Tighten the nuts by hand.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts
can cause the wheel to come loose and even
come off. This could lead to a crash. If you
have to replace them, be sure to get new
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-107 for wheel nut
torque specification.
4. Use the wheel wrench
to tighten the nuts
firmly. Try to move the
tire back and forth
slightly to be sure it is
secure.
5-89
5. Reinstall the center tire cover onto the spare or
flat tire.
6. If your vehicle has a spare tire cover close the
cover and latch the side latch.
To store the jack tool bag and jack:
1. Return the tools to the jack tool bag.
2. Secure the tool bag to the jack by securely wrapping
the straps around the jack. Then, slide the straps
through the rings on the bag and secure.
3. Position the jack and jack tool bag in the
swing-gate.
When reinstalling the jack and jack tool bag, make
sure the jack base is securely seated behind
the tabs in the swing-gate.
4. Reinstall the wing nut retainer to fasten the jack
and tool bag in the storage compartment.
Make sure that the wing nut passes through the tool
bag and the jack before you tighten it.
5. Turn the wing nut retainer clockwise to secure.
6. Reinstall the compartment cover by inserting
the locator tabs in the holes in the swing-gate.
Push the latches down to secure.
5-90
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-62 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-42
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-83 and Storing
a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-89.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well
at speeds up to 70 mph (112 km/h) at the recommended
inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto your
vehicle. This way, a spare tire will be available in case
you need it again. Do not mix tires and wheels of
different sizes, because they will not fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
5-91
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
•Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
•Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
•Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
•Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
•Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
•Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-92
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
•For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
•For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
5-93
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-94
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states
that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not
use it on your vehicle or damage may occur
and it would not be covered by the warranty.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
your vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-99. Follow all
manufacturers’ directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety precautions and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-95.
5-95
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-99.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
5-96
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass with
glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when you
clean the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a buildup of
vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•Extreme dusty conditions
•Sand and salt
•Heat and sun
•Snow and ice, without proper removal
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only approved cleaners on aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-97
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
5-98
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description Usage
Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls
and raised white lettering.
Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome Wheel Cleaner Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Swirl Remover Polish Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
5-99
Description Usage
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-100
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code helps you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-107 for your vehicle’s
engine code.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label
has the following information:
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Model designation
•Paint information
•Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-67.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
5-101
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Power and Heated Seat Circuit
Breakers
There is a circuit breaker located underneath the
driver’s side front seat that controls the power and
heated seat functions.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
5-102
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver side of the engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
To remove the cover, push in on the tabs at the ends of
the cover and lift. To reinstall the cover, line up the
tabs and push down on the cover until the tabs clicks
into place.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
5-103
Fuse Usage
1 Heated Seats
2 Grille Guard
3 Fuel Pump
Fuse Usage
4 Roof Lamp
5 Battery Ignition Switch
6 Front Wiper
5-104
Fuse Usage
7 Regulated Voltage Control Power
8 Power Locks
9 Sunroof, Front Washer Pump
10 Accessories (SPO)
11 Air Compressor
12 Transfer Case Control Module
13 Radio, Heating, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning Display
14 Body Control Module
15 Rear Wiper Motor
16 Rear Wiper Pump Switch
17 Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid
18 Spare 6
19 Cluster
20 Rear Turn Signal, Hazard Signal
21 Powertrain Control Module 1
22 Mass Air Flow Sensor, Purge
Solenoid
23 Injector
24 Fog Lamp
25 Powertrain Control Module B
26 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
27 Airbags
28 Back-up Lamps
Fuse Usage
29 Antilock Brakes, StabiliTrak
®
30 Rear Window Defogger
31 Canister Vent
32 Regulated Voltage Control VSense+
33 Ignition 1
34 Transmission
35 Cruise, Inside Rearview Mirror
36 Horn
37 Driver Side Rear Park Lamp
38 Amplifier
39 Reduced Intensity Low-Beam
Daytime Running Lamps
40 Passenger Side Headlamp
41 Driver Side Headlamp
42 Trailer Back-Up Lamp
43 Front Park Lamps
44 Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid
45 Auxiliary Power 2
46 Electronic Throttle Control
47 Oxygen Sensor
48 Air Conditioning Clutch
49 Passenger Side Rear Park Lamp
50 Spare
51 Auxiliary Power 1
5-105
Fuse Usage
52 StabiliTrak
®
, Antilock Brakes
53 Power Heater Switch
54 Stop
55 Trailer Parking Lamps
56 Front Turn Signal, Hazard Signal
57 Power Sunroof
58 Transfer Case Control Module
Switch
59 Climate Control
60 Spare 8
61 Power Seats
62 Air Pump
63 Passenger Side Power Window
64 Antilock Brakes, StabiliTrak
®
2
Solenoid
67 Antilock Brakes, StabiliTrak
®
1
Motor
68 Driver Side Power Window
82 Climate Control Fan
83 Electronic Brake Controller
84 Trailer B+ Fuse
85 Starter
91 Megafuse
Relay Usage
66 Fuel Pump
69 Fog Lamp
70 High, Low Beam Headlamps
71 Rear Defogger
72 Windshield Wiper On/Off
73 Windshield Wiper High/Low
74 Horn
75 Headlamp
76 Air Conditioning Clutch
77 Powertrain Control Module
78 Run, Crank
79 Reduced Intensity Low-Beam
Daytime Running Lamps
80 Air Injection Reactor (AIR) Solenoid
81 Powertrain (Starter)
86 Spare 2
87 Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning
88 Retained Accessory Power
89 Park Lamp
Diode Usage
65 Wiper Diode
90 Air Conditioning Clutch Diode
5-106
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric. Please refer to Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.
Capacities and Specifications
Application
Capacities
English Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System
3.7L Engine 10.0 qt 9.5 L
5.3L Engine 14.3 qt 13.5 L
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7L and 5.3L Engines 6.0 qt 5.7 L
Fuel Tank 23.0 gal 87.1 L
Transfer Case 1.6 qt 1.5 L
5-107
Capacities and Specifications (cont’d)
Application
Capacities
English Metric
Transmission (Drain and Refill)
3.7L and 5.3L Automatic 5.0 qt 4.7 L
3.7L Manual 2.5 qt 2.4 L
Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 3.7L L5 E Automatic
Manual .040 inches (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 L Automatic .040 inches (1.01 mm)
5-108
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-15
Maintenance Record .....................................6-16
Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your
dealer/retailer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
6-2
This schedule is for vehicles that:
•carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-42.
•are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
•are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-12.
•use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools
and equipment for the job.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you have any doubt, see your dealer/
retailer to have a qualified technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own Service Work on
page 5-4.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-14. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.
6-3
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL message in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means that
service is required for your vehicle. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 3-43. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over
a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18 for information
on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE OIL message appears, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance Iand Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I— Use Maintenance Iif the CHANGE
OIL message comes on within 10 months since the
vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
6-4
Scheduled Maintenance
Service Maintenance IMaintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18.An Emission Control
Service.
••
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. ••
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). ••
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-68 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
on page 6-9.
••
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). ••
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed. ••
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section. ••
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (Ior II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000
(40 000) 50,000
(80 000) 75,000
(120 000) 100,000
(160 000) 125,000
(200 000) 150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks. • •••••
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components. • •••••
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.•••
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•••
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service). •
Change transfer case fluid.
See footnote (g). •••
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service. •
6-6
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000
(40 000) 50,000
(80 000) 75,000
(120 000) 100,000
(160 000) 125,000
(200 000) 150,000
(240 000)
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (k).
•
Maintenance Footnotes
#Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, and
parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints
require lubrication but should not be lubricated unless
their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher, or they could
be damaged.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots and axle seals for leaks.
Rotate and inspect U-joints, retainers, and bolts on rear
drive shaft for seizing or loosening.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
6-7
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
page 5-52 and Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades on page 5-97 for more information.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 1-69.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
rear compartment hinges, outer swing-gate handle pivot
points, rear door detent link, roller mechanism,
swing-gate handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door
hinge, locks, and folding seat hardware. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a
corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
−In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
−In hilly or mountainous terrain.
−When doing frequent trailer towing.
−Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
perform this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-27
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(k) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
6-8
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL
®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-27.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 5-62. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-79.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68.
6-9
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-32.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only
in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle
starts in any other position, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal down halfway,
and try to start the engine. The vehicle should
start only when the clutch pedal is pushed down all
the way to the floor.
If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal is not
pushed all the way down, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-32.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-10
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
•With an automatic transmission, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever
is in PARK (P). The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
•With a manual transmission, the ignition key should
come out only in LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
•To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
•To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-15.
Engine Coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL
®
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-27.
Hydraulic Brake
System Delco
®
Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Windshield
Washer Optikleen
®
Washer Solvent.
Power Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission DEXRON
®
-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Manual
Transmission
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806, in
Canada 89021807).
Hydraulic
Clutch System
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345347, in
Canada 10953517) or equivalent
DOT-3 brake fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
6-12
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Front and Rear
Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Transfer Case Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800, in
Canada 88861801).
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
GM 9985830.
Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Outer
Swing-gate
Handle Pivot
Points
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with
Teflon, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco
®
Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
3.7L and 5.3L Engine 15942429 —
Engine Oil Filter
3.7L Engine 89017342 PF61
5.3L Engine 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs
3.7L Engine 12598004 41-103
5.3L Engine 12571164 41-985
Wiper Blades
Driver –16.7 inches (42.5 cm) 10389555 —
Passenger–15.7 inches (40.0 cm) 10389556 —
Rear –11.8 inches (30.0 cm) 10389557 —
6-14
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.7L L5 Engine
5.3L V8 Engine
6-15
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date Odometer
Reading Serviced By Maintenance Ior
Maintenance II Services Performed
6-16
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date Odometer
Reading Serviced By Maintenance Ior
Maintenance II Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date Odometer
Reading Serviced By Maintenance Ior
Maintenance II Services Performed
6-18
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY) Users .........................7-5
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-5
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-6
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Scheduling Service Appointments .....................7-9
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-9
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-15
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-15
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-16
Event Data Recorders ...................................7-17
OnStar
®
......................................................7-18
Navigation System ........................................7-18
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ..............7-18
Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to HUMMER. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the HUMMER Consumer Relations Manager by calling
1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376), Customer Assistance
prompt. In Canada, contact GM of Canada Customer
Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
•Dealership name and location
•Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting HUMMER, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
you should file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights
you may have.
7-2
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800- 955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after
following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware
of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration
Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in approximately 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may call the
General Motors Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or
you may write to the Mediation/Arbitration Program,
c/o Customer Communication Centre, General Motors of
Canada Limited, Mail Code: CA1-163-005, 1908 Colonel
Sam Drive, Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7. Your inquiry
should be accompanied by your Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
7-3
Online Owner Center
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
•Get e-mail service reminders.
•Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
•Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
•Find GM dealers/retailers for service nationwide.
•Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM Canada
section within www.gmcanada.com.
7-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
HUMMER has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with HUMMER by dialing: 1-800-833-6537.
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
HUMMER encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail HUMMER, refer to the addresses below.
United States – Customer Assistance
HUMMER Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33177
Detroit, MI 48232-5177
www.HUMMER.com
1-866-HUMMER6 (1-866-486-6376)
1-800-833-6537 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-866-HUMMER6
(1-866-486-6376)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas – Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
7-5
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) – Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call
1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376); (Text Telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new HUMMER vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the HUMMER Roadside
Assistance program.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
driving the vehicle without the consent of the owner
is not eligible for coverage.
7-6
Services Provided
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum coverage of $100. These services are
provided at a nominal charge if the vehicle is no longer
in the Powertrain warranty.
•Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). For safety reasons,
propane and other alternate fuels will not be
provided through this service.
•Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if
you have an active OnStar
®
subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
•Emergency Tow from a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling crash.
•Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in
good condition, when equipped and properly
inflated, will be covered at no charge. The customer
is responsible for the repair or replacement of the
tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
•Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
charge if the vehicle does not start.
•Trip Routing Service: Upon request, Roadside
Assistance will send you detailed, computer
personalized maps, highlighting your choice of either
the most direct route or the most scenic route to your
destination, anywhere in North America, along with
helpful travel information pertaining to your trip.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. In Canada, trip routing requests will
be limited to six per calendar year.
•Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) warranty period. Items
covered are hotel, meals, and rental car.
HUMMER and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement to an
owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
7-7
HUMMER Technician Roadside Service
(U.S. only)
HUMMER’s exceptional Roadside Service is more
than an auto club or towing service. It provides every
HUMMER owner in the United States with the
advantage of contacting a HUMMER advisor and, where
available, a HUMMER trained dealer technician who
can provide on-site service.
A dealer technician will travel to your location generally
within a 30 mile radius of a participating HUMMER
dealership. If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have
your car towed to the nearest HUMMER dealership.
Each technician travels with a specially equipped service
vehicle complete with the necessary HUMMER parts
and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
•Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
•Telephone number of your location
•Location of the vehicle
•Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
•Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
•Description of the problem
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Service coverage
are towing or services for vehicles operated on a
non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing
caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State,
Provincial or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or
changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction
devices.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HUMMER and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
7-8
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)
from the dealership.
7-9
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle
service, the expense must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please
see your dealer for the maximum number of days
allowed and the allowance per rental day. Rental
reimbursement must be supported by original receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-10
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used
for repair. These parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion
problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure
related to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
7-11
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts. If such insurance
coverage is not available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
•Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
•If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
•Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
•If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 7-6 for more information.
•If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
7-12
•Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
•Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
•If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you can
get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
•Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
•Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
7-13
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Call 1-866-HUMMER6 (486-6376), or write:
HUMMER Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33177
Detroit, MI 48232-5177
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
7-15
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
7-16
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
•How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
•How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if
the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;
in response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used
for GM research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner.
7-17
OnStar
®
If your vehicle has OnStar
®
and you subscribe to
the OnStar
®
services, please refer to the OnStar
®
Terms
and Conditions for information on data collection and
use. See also OnStar
®
System on page 2-48 in
this manual for more information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
7-18
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-68
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-101
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-22
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-30
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-29
Airbag System ................................................ 1-54
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .... 1-61
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-59
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-57
Airbag Systems
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-68
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-60
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-62
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-67
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-60
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-62
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ... 3-62
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-4
Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-34
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-97
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-94
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-99
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-95
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-93
Finish Care ................................................. 5-96
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-98
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces .............................. 5-94
Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-91
Leather ...................................................... 5-93
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-98
Tires .......................................................... 5-98
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-98
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-99
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-95
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-94
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-97
Appointments, Scheduling Service ....................... 7-9
Ashtray ......................................................... 3-22
Assist Steps ................................................... 4-31
Audio System ................................................. 3-48
Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-62
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual .............................. 3-61
Radio Reception .......................................... 3-61
1
Audio System (cont.)
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-48
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-61
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-62
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-49
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-17
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-21
Operation ................................................... 2-23
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-41
Electric Power Management .......................... 3-20
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-20
Bench Seat, Split (60/40) ................................... 1-8
Brake
Emergencies ................................................ 4-5
Brakes .......................................................... 5-38
System Warning Light .................................. 3-33
Braking ........................................................... 4-3
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-18
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-49
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-49
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-46
Headlamps ................................................. 5-49
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
License Plate Lamps .................................... 5-51
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-52
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-50
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-71
C
Calibration ............................................. 2-38, 2-41
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ....... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-107
Carbon Monoxide ........................... 2-10, 2-36, 4-50
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-94
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-59
Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-59
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-77
Charging System Light .................................... 3-32
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-36
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-11
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-99
2
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-37
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-33
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-42
Older Children ............................................. 1-30
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................ 1-48
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position ......................... 1-50
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-51
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-40
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-22
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-97
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-95
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-93
Finish Care ................................................. 5-96
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-94
Interior ....................................................... 5-91
Leather ...................................................... 5-93
Tires .......................................................... 5-98
Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-98
Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-95
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-94
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ....... 5-97
Climate Control System ................................... 3-22
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-24
Clock ............................................................ 3-48
Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-26
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11
Compass ............................................... 2-38, 2-41
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-14
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-59
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-35
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-22
Cooling System .............................................. 5-31
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-39
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-56
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-9
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY) Users ........................ 7-5
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-5
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-6
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ..... 7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-14
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-15
3
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-17
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-19
Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-20
Door
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-40
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-40
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-43
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-32
Before a Long Trip ...................................... 4-34
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-34
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-34
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-33
Off-Road .................................................... 4-12
Recovery Loops .......................................... 4-40
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-40
Winter ........................................................ 4-35
E
EDR ............................................................. 7-16
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-101
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-103
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-102
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-102
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-101
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-20
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-36
Coolant ...................................................... 5-27
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-22
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-35
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-15
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-36
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-36
Oil ............................................................. 5-15
Oil Life System ........................................... 5-18
Overheating ................................................ 5-29
Running While Parked .................................. 2-37
Starting ...................................................... 2-20
Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-17
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-20
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-30
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-15
4
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-98
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-62
Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-78
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-79
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-89
Fluid ..................................................... 5-21, 5-24
Power Steering ........................................... 5-36
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-37
Fog Lamp
Fog ........................................................... 3-19
Four-Wheel Drive ............................................ 5-46
Four-Wheel Drive, Full-Time ............................. 2-27
Front Armrest Storage Area .............................. 2-57
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-46
Front Seat Storage Net .................................... 2-57
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Fuel (cont.)
Filling the Tank ............................................. 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-40
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-103
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-102
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-101
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-35
Fuel .......................................................... 3-40
Speedometer .............................................. 3-27
Tachometer ................................................. 3-27
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-51
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-56
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-6
5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-46
Headlamps .................................................... 5-49
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-49
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-17
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-15
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-49
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
On Reminder .............................................. 3-16
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Heater ........................................................... 3-22
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-39
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-34
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-34
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-11
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-16
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-26
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-18
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-33
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-62
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-19
Cluster ....................................................... 3-26
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-42
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
6
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-55
Lamps
Dome ........................................................ 3-19
Dome Lamp Override ................................... 3-20
Off-Road .................................................... 3-18
Reading ..................................................... 3-20
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-24
LATCH System
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-42
License Plate Lamps ....................................... 5-51
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-29
Antilock Brake System Warning ..................... 3-34
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-33
Charging System ......................................... 3-32
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-39
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-39
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-36
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-38
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator .................. 3-30
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-28
Security ..................................................... 3-39
StabiliTrak
®
Not Ready ................................. 3-34
Light (cont.)
Tire Pressure .............................................. 3-35
Traction Off ................................................ 3-34
Up-Shift ..................................................... 3-32
Lighting
Exit ........................................................... 3-20
Lights
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-15
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
On Reminder .............................................. 3-16
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-42
Locking Rear Axle ............................................ 4-6
Lockout Protection ............................................ 2-9
Locks
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Lockout Protection ......................................... 2-9
Power Door .................................................. 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-10
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-57
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-3
7
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16
Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-14
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-36
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Manual Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-24
Operation ................................................... 2-26
Manual, Using .................................................... iii
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-43
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-41
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar
®
,
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-38
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-44
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-43
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-18
Navigation/Radio System,
see Navigation Manual ................................. 3-61
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-18
8
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-27
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-27
Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-12
Off-Road Lamps ............................................. 3-18
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-10
OilEngine ....................................................... 5-15
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-38
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-18
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-30
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4
OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-18
OnStar
®
System, see OnStar
®
Manual ............... 2-48
Operation, Universal Home Remote System ........ 2-52
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-24
Outlets
Accessory Power ......................................... 3-21
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-44
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-43
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Paint, Damage ............................................... 5-98
Park Aid ........................................................ 2-44
Park Brake .................................................... 2-32
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-33
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-35
Parking
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-36
Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-35
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-30
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-62
Passing ......................................................... 4-10
PASS-Key
®
III+ .............................................. 2-16
PASS-Key
®
III+ Operation ................................ 2-16
Passlock
®
...................................................... 2-15
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California ...... 5-4
Power
Door Locks .................................................. 2-8
Electrical System ....................................... 5-102
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-3
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-20
Seat ............................................................ 1-3
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-36
Windows .................................................... 2-12
9
Privacy .......................................................... 7-16
Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-17
Navigation System ....................................... 7-18
OnStar ....................................................... 7-18
Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-18
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-8
R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-29
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID), Privacy .... 7-18
Radios .......................................................... 3-48
Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-49
Radios
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................... 3-61
Reception ................................................... 3-61
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-48
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-61
Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-20
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-45
Locking ........................................................ 4-6
Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-9
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-59
Rear Vision Camera ........................................ 2-44
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ......................... 3-11
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-41
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar
®
, Compass and Temperature Display ..... 2-38
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recovery Loops .............................................. 4-40
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-48
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System, Operation ... 2-5
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-83
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-81
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-52
Replacement Parts, Maintenance ...................... 6-14
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-15
General Motors ........................................... 7-15
United States Government ............................ 7-14
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-69
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-70
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-20
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-40
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-15
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-37
10
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-28
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-94
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-16
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-24
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-30
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-29
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-10
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
60/40 Split Bench Seat .................................. 1-8
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-3
Power Seats ................................................. 1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-50
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-48
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-51
Security Light ................................................. 3-39
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-5
California Pershlorate Materials Requirements .... 5-4
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-36
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-15
Service, Scheduling Appointments ....................... 7-9
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-67
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-98
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-33
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-35
Side Steps ..................................................... 4-31
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-91
Installing .................................................... 5-83
Removing ................................................... 5-81
Storing ....................................................... 5-89
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-107
Speedometer .................................................. 3-27
Split Bench Seat (60/40) .................................... 1-8
StabiliTrak
®
System .......................................... 4-7
StabiliTrak
®
Not Ready Light ............................. 3-34
11
Starting the Engine ......................................... 2-20
Steering .......................................................... 4-8
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7
Storage Areas
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-59
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-56
Front Armrest Storage Area ........................... 2-57
Front Seat Storage Net ................................ 2-57
Glove Box .................................................. 2-56
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-57
Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-59
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-39
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-13
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-60
Swing-gate ..................................................... 2-10
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-27
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .... 5-50
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-61
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-14
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-14
PASS-Key
®
III+ ........................................... 2-16
PASS-Key
®
III+ Operation ............................. 2-16
Passlock
®
................................................... 2-15
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Time, Setting .................................................. 3-48
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-35
Tires ............................................................. 5-54
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ................................................. 5-97
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-71
Chains ....................................................... 5-77
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-79
Cleaning .................................................... 5-98
Different Size .............................................. 5-73
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-78
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-62
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-68
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-83
Pressure Monitor Operation ........................... 5-65
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-63
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-83
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-81
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-91
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-89
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-55
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-59
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-74
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-75
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-75
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-70
12
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-48
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-50
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-48
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-5
Off Light ..................................................... 3-34
StabiliTrak
®
System ....................................... 4-7
Trailer
Recommendations ....................................... 4-62
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-21
Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-24
Up-Shift Light .............................................. 3-32
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-23
Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-26
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-27
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-74
Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-51
Operation ................................................... 2-52
Up-Shift Light ................................................. 3-32
Using this Manual ............................................... iii
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-3
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-42
Parking Your ............................................... 2-35
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-16
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-100
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-101
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-24
Visors ........................................................... 2-13
13
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-25
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-43
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-75
Different Size .............................................. 5-73
Replacement ............................................... 5-75
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-40
Windows ....................................................... 2-11
Power ........................................................ 2-12
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning .......... 5-97
Washer ...................................................... 3-10
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-37
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-52
Wiper Fuses ............................................. 5-101
Wipers ....................................................... 3-10
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ........................ 3-11
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-35
X
XM Radio Messages ....................................... 3-60
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-62
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
14

Navigation menu